Main Vision Manual – III – Main Vision Manual

Authors Radiant Technologies Inc.

Plaintext

Main Vision Manual

User guide
2021
Main Vision Manual 2

Table of Contents

Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 4
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4
Contact Radiant Technologies, Inc. .............................................................................................. 14
Contact Radiant Technologies, Inc. ...................................................................................... 14
Main Vision Manual ..................................................................................................................... 15
I - Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 15
II - Overview ............................................................................................................................. 15
III - Startup ............................................................................................................................. 16
IV - Making Measurements ...................................................................................................... 26
V - Main Menu.......................................................................................................................... 46
A. File Menu ........................................................................................................................ 46
B. Explorer Menu.................................................................................................................. 51
C. View Menu ...................................................................................................................... 58
D. Tools Menu ...................................................................................................................... 60
E. QuikLook Menu ............................................................................................................. 77
F. EDITOR Menu ............................................................................................................... 92
G. DataSet Menu................................................................................................................. 103
H. Library Menu ............................................................................................................... 109
I. Data Plotting Menu ....................................................................................................... 111
J. Log Menu ....................................................................................................................... 120
K. Calculator Menu .......................................................................................................... 127
L. Help Menu..................................................................................................................... 129
VI - Library and Tasks ......................................................................................................... 143
VII - Global User Variables ................................................................................................. 175
VIII - QuikLook and Exporting .............................................................................................. 176
IX - EDITOR and Test Definitions ......................................................................................... 187
X - DataSets and the DataSet Explorer............................................................................... 194
XI - Data Plotting .................................................................................................................... 213
XII - Variable Task Icons ....................................................................................................... 230
XIII - Nested Branch Looping ................................................................................................ 233
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 3

XIV - Test Definition Graphing.............................................................................................. 235
XV - Document Library .......................................................................................................... 259
XV - Editor Aide ................................................................................................................... 261
XVI - Data Mining .................................................................................................................. 278
XVII - ETD Transfer .............................................................................................................. 306
XVIII - Simple Measurement .............................................................................................. 319
Discussion ........................................................................................................................... 320
Operation............................................................................................................................. 323
Dialogs ................................................................................................................................ 339
Select Target DataSet...................................................................................................... 339
Main Dialog Control ..................................................................................................... 346
Configuration Dialog .................................................................................................... 349
Measurement Dialog ..................................................................................................... 353
XVIII - Newly-Added Tools ................................................................................................. 362
Runtime Tabular Text Export ............................................................................................. 363
Runtime Data Image Export ............................................................................................... 366
Custom Text-File Branch Loop Parameter Adjustment............................................... 368

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 4

Introduction

Vision Program for Precision Testers

The Precision Family of Ferroelectric Testers
The Precision Materials Analyzer family of ferroelectric testers provides a full range of high-
speed, high-precision ferroelectric material characterization instruments to meet every budget
and research need. A comparison of model cost, speed and voltage capability is given at Vision
Testers. All systems are capable of internally-generated sample stimulus voltages of 10.0 Volts1.
Most systems include internal amplifiers that allow 100.0-Volt measurements. 200.0-Volt and
500.0-Volt options are also available. Voltages of up to 10,000 Volts can be used by adding an
accessory High Voltage Amplifier (HVA) and High Voltage Interface (HVI). The researcher
may connect any existing amplifier, provided a logic unit (known as an ID Module) is obtained
from RTI. The latest HVI model, released in 2017, has the ID module built into the instrument. It
is programmed for delivery at Radiant Technologies, Inc., but may be reprogrammed at any time
by the user.

The Vision Program
A single, unifying program, called Vision, provides a consistent compatible interface across all
hardware architectures. It is designed with the understanding that what is important in ferroelec-
tric testing is maintaining a complete and accurate history of the signals applied to, and the re-
sponses of, a sample. The researcher has the capability to create custom experiments that are as
simple or elaborate as required. Experiments can be run, rerun, reconfigured and repeated. As an
experiment is executed, it is saved along with the measured data to be recalled for reuse. Data
can easily be recalled for examination. On-board tools are available to provide data analysis and
comparison of multiple data vectors. Data may be exported directly to Excel, Word, text files or
a printer for analysis and publication. Data are organized into archives that hold both the data
and the experiments that produced them. These archives are uniquely named and are written to
individual files that may be sorted and stored in any way that is most logical to the researcher.
These files can be emailed or written to an external data storage (USB drive, CD, etc.) for use by
other researchers that are running the Vision program. Vision can be installed on non-tester
computers for the purpose of recalling and reviewing data or creating experimental Test Defini-
tions.

This manual provides a complete description and set of instructions for the use of Vision Version
5.x.x. (As of this writing, Vision 5.26.4 is being shipped.) The system is large and complex, but
is designed so that the new user can begin to get immediate results without exhaustive training.
Much of the detail of the program is segmented into Tasks that perform specific functions. Tasks
may be very simple or very complex, but the user need only learn to use the Tasks that are im-
portant to the research at hand. The manual gives a complete overview of the program, a number
of tutorial sessions, step-by-step operating procedures for the most common operations in Vision
and a detailed description of each Task including a discussion of every control that appears on
every dialog. The Task descriptions are also available using the Click For Task Instructions but-
ton on any dialog associated with the Task.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 5

The Vision program, its Tasks and its drivers, as well as these help pages, are under constant de-
velopment. In order to use the most up-to-date and efficient release of the Vision program please
visit the Vision download form regularly. The current Vision version and release date are noted
near the top of the form. If an update is in order, fill in the form and click Submit. You will be
linked to the Vision installer download page. Review the information on the page. Then click the
installer download button and install or update per the instructions on the page.

A Note on Vision Structure and Versioning
The Vision program is a framework program that provides services to Vision Tasks. Tasks are
semi-independent agents that perform the work within the program. Tasks loaded by Vision at
runtime into the Task Library. Some Tasks are also loaded into the Vision QuikLook Menu.

Figure 1 - Tasks in the Task Library and Figure 2 - Task in the
QuikLook Menu.
The Vision program version is divided into three sections. The first is the main version. It repre-
sents major changes or additions to the program that occur infrequently. The current version is
"5". The second digit represents changes to the main framework program that happen frequently
but are of significant influence on the program. At this writing the second digit in the Vision ver-
sion is "12". In some cases these changes will not be apparent to the customer. The final digit
(currently "10") represents minor changes. In all cases, changes to the Vision version number
refer only to changes to the framework program, not to changes to individual Tasks or groups of

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 6

Tasks. The Vision version can be seen by going to Help->About Vision. Note that the "(R)" in
the version number indicates that this is a release compilation of the program for customers.

Figure 3 - The "About Vision" Dialog.
As a semi-independent agent, each Task has its own version. The first two numbers of the Task
version will always agree with the first two digits of the Vision program version. When the Vi-
sion version was updated to "5.12.0" all Tasks were also updated to "5.12.0". After that point, the
Vision program version - representing changes to the framework - and the Task version will di-
verge as changes are made to individual Tasks. Task versions will also differ from each other.
The configuration dialog for each Task will show the Task version, the date of the version and
the initial release year. Measurement Tasks that present data in a dialog will show the same in-
formation on that dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 7

Figure 4 - Task Versions.
The "About Vision" dialog of Figure 3 also shows a "Driver Version". The Driver is a Windows
DLL program that takes input from Vision and formats it so that it can be understood by the test-
er. It communicates the information to the tester and receives tester response. The response is
reformatted for, and passed back to, the Vision program. The driver program version will gener-
ally resemble the Vision version but is completely independent.

If you are having trouble with your tester, your Vision program or with Windows interface to
either we will often ask you for the Vision and/or Driver version. Vision provides tools that
make it easy for you to obtain that information in a suitable format and send it to us. If we need
such information we will guide you to those tools.

Licensing
Vision is freely distributed to any and all parties who have an interest without further license.
The program may be downloaded any number of times and may be instaled on any number of
host computers. The practical uses of the program are limited without a Precision tester, but the
program is fully operational with or without a tester. With no tester present, data-collecting
Tasks will generate meaningless synthetic data. Any party can register a DataSet taken by any
other party to review archived data and investigate the construction of the experiment (Test Def-
inition).

Licensing Custom Task Suites
A number of groups of Vision Tasks, known as Custom Task Suites must be purchased and li-
censed before they will operate. The Tasks are freely distributed with Vision. Any user can open
the Task configuration dialog for review and to access the Task Instructions. Any user can re-
view Custom Task data collected by a licensed installation of the Custom Task. However, to op-
erate the Task it must be licensed. The license is in the form of a file named Security.sec that is
placed in C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Technologies\Vision\System. The Task is coded to the
Task Suite or Task Suites being purchased. It is also coded to an embedded ID in the tester for
which it is purchased. In order for a Custom Task to operate, the security.sec file must be in

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 8

place and the specified tester must be connected to the Vision host and powered.

The security.sec file may be copied to any number of host computers. However, it cannot be
transferred to any other Precision Tester.

Task Suites include:

• Chamber (Pyroelectric): Set Temperature/Measure at a series of temperatures. This
offers automatic control of a variety of thermal controllers.
• Chamber: Measure using PUND.
• Remanent Chamber: Measure using Remanent Hysteresis.
• Piezo: Measure the sample polarization (µC/cm2) and displacement response. The
displacement response is measured by an external displacement detector and captured
as a voltage at the SENSOR port.
• Piezo: Basic measurement. Normally used for bulk samples. There are minimal
onboard noise reduction tools.
• Advanced Piezo: Normally used for thin film samples with data taken from an
AFM. There are advanced noise reduction tools and extensive data processing.
• Piezo Filter: Gather, operate on, store and plot Piezoelectric data from one or
more Piezo and/or Advanced Piezo Task.
• Transistor: Capture transistor drain current as a function of VSource and VGate.
• Transistor Current: Transistor response at a single Vgs and Vds.
• Transistor IV: Transistor response at a single Vds over a range of Vgs.
• Transistor Curve Trace: Series of Transistor responses at a single Vds over a range
of Vgs. Vds changes at each sweep.
• Magneto-Electric: Capture sample polarization (µC/cm2) as a function of a variable
magnetic field provided by a Helmholtz coil. Older installations used a KEPCO BOP
36 current amplifier to provide stimulus to the Helmholtz coil. These also used a
Lakeshore 425 Gaussmeter to calibrate the field at the sample. Later measurements us
the RTI CS 2.5 current source to drive the Helmholtz coil. Hall Effect sensors are
built into a shield box to directly detect the magnetic field at measurement time. M.E.
Tasks are divided into Kepco and CS 2.5 groups.
• Magneto-Electric Response: Hysteresis style polarization (µC/cm2) over a period-
ic magnetic field (G).
• DC Field: Set and hold a fixed DC magnetic field (G) for a user-specified period
of time (s).
• Single-Point C/V (MR): measure sample small-signal capacitance (nF) using a
magnetic field (G) stimulus.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 9

Figure 5 - Notice Appears when Unlicensed Piezo is Accessed. The
Configuration Dialog will Open when the Notice is Closed.
A small note on text format in these Help pages.
There is not a large list of various textual representations in the Vision help pages. However,
these few rules do apply:

1. Vision key words are always capitalized, as in Task, DataSet or Test Definition.
2. Names of controls on dialogs are italicized as in Task Name , VMax or Comments .
3. Text within controls is specified in quotations. For example '... and set Task Name to
"5.0-Volt Hysteresis".'
4. References to figures and tables with in text are set in bold type as in '... Figure 7 rep-
resents...'.

A small note on Vision documentation
This collection of documents forms the main Vision manual. It, along with Task-specific and
dialog-specific help, accessed by clicking Click For Task Instructions/Click For Dialog Instruc-
tions on any Vision dialog, form the complete set of program documentation. The Vision pro-
gram changes frequently. Documentation will normally lag behind program updating, sometimes
by significant periods of time. One consequence is often that an image of a dialog or set of con-
trols in the documents to not exactly resemble the program windows being discussed. Neverthe-
less, Vision is designed to grow naturally so that older documentation will still be correct and
helpful, even where it may be incomplete.

Note that Task Instructions will provide more detailed Task-specific information that is also like-
ly to be more up-to-date than these general Vision help pages. The Task Instructions should form
the major reference for the Vision program.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 10

System Requirements
All modern Windows-based host computers have sufficient resources to install and operate the
Vision program. Vision should install and operate correctly under 32-bit and 64-bit Windows
operating system from Windows XP through Windows 10. However Radiant Technologies, Inc.
can no longer provide customer support for installations on Windows versions older than Win-
dows 7.

Maintaining Vision
The Vision program does not have tools installed on the host computer to search for version up-
dates. However, the Vision program is upgraded very frequently. Two or three version updates in
a week are not unheard of. Often these updates include significant improvements or important
fixes. Furthermore, the first request when you are asking Radiant Technologies, Inc. for assis-
tance will be to ensure that you are running the latest Vision.

To update Vision, go to http://www.ferrodevices.com/1/297/download_vision_software.asp, fill
in the form and click Submit. You will be linked to the Vision Installer Download page. Review
the information on the page and click the download button. Acknowledge all warning. Allow the
file to download and then run it. The installer will quickly update most installations. Older Vi-
sion installations must be uninstalled before the installer will write the newer version. Unin-
stalling using the standard Windows program uninstall tool will leave custom files such as secu-
rity.sec and custom DataSets in place.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 11

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 12

Figure 6 -Vision Install/Update Form.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 13

Figure 7 - Vision Installer Download Page
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 14

Contact Radiant Technologies, Inc.
Mr. Joe Evans President
Ms. Michelle Bell Marketing and Sales
Mr. Bob Howard Hardware Design and Construction
Mr. Spencer Smith Hardware Design and Vision/Hardware Interface (Driver)
Mr. Scott Chapman Software Design and Programming, Training, Customer Support
2835 Pan American Fwy NE
Suite B and C
Albuquerque, NM 87107
1-800-289-7176
505-842-8007 Voice
505-842-0366 FAX
radiant@ferrodevices.com
www.ferrodevices.com Process and Clean Room
www.ferroelectrictesters.com Precision Testers
.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 15

Main Vision Manual

I - Introduction

These help pages provide a complete and detailed description of the Vision program that is used
to control the Precision test hardware, capture the Precision measurements and organize, store,
analyze, display and export the captured data. The main manual provides a complete overview of
the Vision system. Vision is actually a collection of programs of varying number. Vision itself
provides a framework for the construction and execution of experiments (or Test Definitions)
and the organization of data. Semi-independent programs, known as Tasks, are loaded by Vision
at startup and used to perform the various experimental functions. Features of the Vision frame-
work program are provided in detail here, and supplemented with tutorials and step-by-step pro-
cedures in preceding and subsequent topics.

II - Overview

The Vision software is an integral part of the Precision Precision Materials Analyzer Family. It
comes fully configured and ready to operate on the Precision Family. Vision software originally
ran over the Windows NT 4.0 operating system and would actually operate on any host that
boots under Windows NT 4.0. Vision now runs under Windows 7, 8, 8.1 and 10. Windows 2000,
XP and Vista are not longer supported. The Vision software may be downloaded onto any sys-
tem by connecting to the Radiant Technologies, Inc. web site at
http://www.ferrodevices.com/1/297/download_vision_software.asp. For users that received the
Vision program with their test system, upgrades to both the Vision program and new and up-
graded Tasks (see below) will be placed on the web site frequently. Running the program on a
host with no Precision Family Tester attached will cause a synthetic data generator to be engaged
that will produce meaningless data if measurements are attempted. The value of placing the pro-
gram on a non-tester host is to be able to remotely design experiments that can then be moved to
the Precision Family or to analyze data that have been acquired remotely on a tester.

The Vision program is located in the directory called C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Technolo-
gies\Vision. This folder contains two subfolders and a total of more than 100 files in the main
folder and subfolders. The C:\Windows\SysWOW64 folder contains a driver that is started au-
tomatically when Vision is started and the tester(s) is (are) detected. This is called
NGS_USB_DRIVER.DLL. This driver also depends on a file called Stop.dll in the same directo-
ry. C:\DataSets is the default repository for the DataSets files. (DataSets are described in detail,
below.) C:\DataSets folder also contains a number of files that may be both read from and writ-
ten to by Vision. These files have been moved from the C:\ or C:\Program Files\... path to allow
Vision to write them regardless of the user's permissions. The registry contains various paths and
system values. None of these files, folders or registry entries should be moved, deleted or re-
named or the system will not operate.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 16

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen
III - Startup

This topic discusses the various actions taken by Vision and the user on program startup.

III.1: Before Main Vision Window Display

Between the time the user initiates the Vision program and the time the program displays
the main Vision window, several actions take place.

1. Vision searches C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Technologies\Vision\System for all
files with a *.vlr extension. Each *.vlr file represents a Task that is available to Vision.
Each Task found in the specified path is loaded into the Vision Library, with the excep-
tion of a very small number of Tasks that appear only in the QuikLook menu.
2. As Vision loads Tasks into the Library, the Task is examined to determine if it should
be placed into the QuikLook menu. If it is to appear in the QuikLook menu, it is exam-
ined for the category under which it is to be placed in the menu (Hysteresis Task, Pulse
Task, External Instrument Task, etc.) and sorted into that category in the menu. The
Task also has its Library name modified with " (QL)" appended to the name. This is an
indication in the Library that the Task is a QuikLook Task and may be accessed (con-
figured and executed) from the Library by double-clicking.
3. Vision reviews the file C:\DataSets\xplorerdb.cpu and uses the file to load registered

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 17

DataSets into the DataSet Explorer window.
4. If Vision does not find C:\DataSets\xplorerdb.cpu it creates the file and notifies the user
as in Figure 1. On first installation, the Vision installer writes a default
C:\DataSets\xplorerdb.cpu and this message will not normally appear on first startup af-
ter installation.

Figure 1 - Initial DataSet Explorer Data Base Creation.
5. Vision reviews the file C:\DataSets\xplorerdb.cpu and registers the DataSets specified
in the file to the DataSet Explorer.
6. Vision reviews the registry HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/Radiant Technolo-
gies/VisionPro/Settings path for various user-selected Vision configuration options.
These keep the Vision operation persistent from one execution to the next.
7. If the "RELOADEDITOR" registry key is set to "True", Vision reviews the file
C:\DataSets\EditorList.el and uses the file to reload the Test Definition that was present
in the EDITOR when the program was shut down. If the registry key is "False", the
EDITOR is not reloaded. The option is set in the Tools->Reload Editor Test Definition
on Startup option in the main Vision menu (Figure 2). Note that a corrupt
C:\DataSets\EditorList.el file may cause Vision to fail on startup. If Vision is not start-
ing, but producing a Windows failure dialog, remove the C:\DataSets\EditorList.el file,
or edit the RELOADEDITOR registry entry and set it to "False", then try the startup
again. If Vision continues to fail, it is for another reason. Note that if Vision is config-
ured to reload the EDITOR, but does not find C:\DataSets\EditorList.el, it will produce
the message of Figure 3, but will start normally.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 18

Figure 2 - Adjust the EDITOR Reload Option.

Figure 3 - C:\DataSets\EditorList.EL Not Found.
8. Vision detects and starts drivers for all attached Precision testers.
9. Vision opens the Main Vision Window. If the registry entry "RESTOREWINPOS" is
set to "True", the program windows will be returned to the state they were in when the
previous instance of Vision was shut down. Windows size and docking position (or un-
docked location) will be maintained. If the registry entry is set to "False", the windows
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 19

will always open in the default size and position. This option is set in using the View-
>Restore Window Position on Startup Vision menu option (Figure 4).

Figure 4 - Adjust the Window Position on Startup Option.
III.2: Initial Windows Display

As noted above, when Vision first starts it detects any Precision tester connected to the
host computer through USB connections and starts the drivers for the connected testesr.
When the Vision program display is opened, an initial dialog is presented that lists the
tester. If no tester was detected, the dialog indicates "No Tester Attached" ( Figure 5 ). In
this case, the dialog is of little value. It must be closed by clicking Cancel . At that point,
Vision can be operated normally, though no actual measurement data can be collected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 20

Figure 5 - Vision Startup Tester Selector Dialog. No Powered Test-
ers are Connected.
If a tester is identified on startup, the dialog will list the tester in the Attached Tester con-
trol of the dialog. With a tester present, the dialog becomes a useful tool. With multiple
testers attached, the tool becomes even more useful. Earlier documentation indicated that
multiple testers could be connected of which one would be selected. Multiple testers are no
longer supported. The Tester Selection dialog remains unchanged with legacy controls that
operate on multiple testers.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 21

Figure 6 - Vision Startup Tester Selector Dialog. Two Powered Test-
ers are Connected.
If a tester is connected and powered it is listed in the dialog by name. The name is written
to and read from the tester's EEPROM. The name may be assigned or changed by the user,
and written "permanently" to the tester EEPROM in the dialog. When the tester is selected
in Attached Tester , its name appears in the Tester Name control. That control may be edit-
ed. Once it is edited, clicking Rename Tester will cause the tester's name in its EEPROM
to be updated. Naming a tester is particularly useful in cases where multiple testers of the
same type are connected to the host. Unique names will help distinguish the testers.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 22

Figure 7 - Renaming a Tester.
The dialog offers a legacy ID tool. Selecting the tester name in Attached Tester and click-
ing ID Tester will cause the tester's green light to blink rapidly for about five seconds, sig-
naling which tester is selected.

The Select Tester button is a legacy control that allowed a single tester to be selected for
operation from a list of several testers. Only a single tester may now be operated and this

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 23

control offers no current function.

Once the tester configuration has been properly adjusted, close the dialog by clicking OK .
A prompt dialog will appear that indicates that the program will enter a tester calibration
procedure. Click Yes to allow the calibration to proceed. The Vision status bar will indicate
that the program is calibrating the tester with "Zeroing Tester Output... Standby...". A Stop
Measure Ramp Offsets? button will also appear. Calibration is complete when the button
disappears and the status bar indicates "Ready".

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 24

Figure 8 - Calibrate the Tester.
Vision is then ready for normal operation. The hardware configuration may be changed -
testers may be added and/or removed, or tester selection changed - without closing and re-
starting Vision. Make the appropriate hardware configuration changes, then press <Alt-
W> or select "Tools-> Hardware Refresh". Vision will redetect and reinitialize any con-
nected, powered testers and the Tester Selection dialog will reappear. When the dialog is
closed the calibration procedure of Figure 8 will proceed. The Hardware Refresh option
must be exercised any time that there is a hardware change such as turning a tester on or
off or adding a High-Voltage Interface (HVI).

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 25

Figure 9 - Hardware Refresh after Hardware Reconfiguration.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 26

IV - Making Measurements

IV.1 - Discussion
Once the Vision and the tester are installed, Vision has started and the tester has been calibrated,
the next order of business is to start to make these tools work by making measurements. To this
end, it is important to distinguish two different methods of accessing measurements from within
Vision: QuikLook and DataSet Test Definition. This discussion presents a quick introduction to
these two methods. The rest of this manual provides in-depth discussion of the methods and Vi-
sion tools that support them. It is highly recommended that you work through the Tutorials.
These will provide a quick and in-depth education into the use of the Vision program.

IV.2 - QuikLook
The Vision program serves as a framework that provides services to a variable list of semi-
independent agents known as Tasks. Tasks are configurable and executable entities that do the
work in Vision. On Vision startup, Tasks are identified and loaded into the Vision Task Library.
A subset of Tasks - primarily those that interact directly with the tester - are also loaded into the
QuikLook menu.

(Note that, for these discussions, the Hysteresis Task is used extensively to provide the example
measurements. The Hysteresis Task is the most fundamental measurement performed by Vision
and the Precision tester. At the tester RETURN port it captures the charge Q (µC) from a sample
electrode induced by a voltage applied to the opposite electrode by the tester DRIVE port. The
charge is normalized by the sample area (cm2) to produce polarization (µC/cm2)).

QuikLook measurements provide fast access to measured data by presenting Tasks that can be
immediately configured and executed, with Measurement Tasks displaying data on execution.
Go to QuikLook->Hysteresis-Hysteresis.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 27

Figure 1 - Initiate the Hysteresis Task from the QuikLook Menu.
The Hysteresis Task QuikLook configuration dialog immediately appears. The dialog presents a
complex set of controls. Just a few controls will be adjusted for this measurement. But a com-
plete discussion of the Task - its theory, configuration and execution - can be accessed by click-
ing Click For Task Instructions. This opens a help project that provides complete detail of the
meaning of, use of and interaction between every control.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 28

Figure 2 - Hysteresis QuikLook Configuration and Task Instruc-
tions.
In the configuration dialog these few controls were adjusted:

• Hysteresis Task Name - All Tasks include a Task Name. Tasks are identified throughout
Vision by their Task Name. It is important to assign a unique and meaningful name to the
Tasks, although this is less important in QuikLook.
• Max Voltage - This is the maximum DRIVE port signal strength to be applied to the sam-
ple electrode. In this standard default state, a bipolar triangular voltage profile will be ap-
plied, peaking at this voltage.
• Hysteresis Period (ms) - This is the duration of the application of the DRIVE voltage pro-
file. It is equivalent to 1000/Frequency (Hz).
• Sample Area (cm2) - This is the surface area of the smaller of the two sample electrodes.
This value is provided as documentation. It also affects the magnitude of the polarization
response since polarization (µC/cm2) is charge (µC) normalized by sample area (cm2).
• Sample Thickness (µm) - This is the depth of the sample ferroelectric material between
the two sample electrodes. This is primarily intended for documentation, but may be used
if data are to be plotted, and/or signal is to be specified, in units of electric field (kV/cm).
Here, electric field (kV/cm) is given by:

Field (kV/cm) = Voltage / ( 1000 V/kV x Sample Thickness (µm) x 10-4 cm/µm) (1)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 29

Many of the other controls will also influence the measurement, but are left in their default state.
These are discussed in detail in the Task Instructions.

Since the QuikLook execution of the Hysteresis Task will present its data on a data plot as soon
as the data are captured, a QuikLook Plot Setup tab is available as part of the QuikLook configu-
ration. The dialog is primarily used to specify plot labels. The user can also opt to plot as a func-
tion of Voltage or Field (kV/cm). Plot Filter offers a variety of mathematical manipulations that
can be applied to the data before plotting. (See the Task Instructions for complete details.) A
Comments field is common to all Tasks. It can be used to provide extensive detailed documenta-
tion of the Task configuration, the sample, the purpose of the measurement, etc. Detail, here in
QuikLook, is less important than in DataSet Test Definition measurements.

Figure 3 - Hysteresis QuikLook Plot Configuration.
Click OK to make the measurement. The data are displayed in a Data Presentation dialog. The
dialog also offers several options. These are discussed in detail in the Task Instructions and
throughout this manual.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 30

Figure 4 - Hysteresis QuikLook Data Presentation Dialog.
Although QuikLook configuration and execution is quick and relatively simple, it is a very lim-
ited option. As soon as the dialog of Figure 4 is closed the data are lost forever. The only way to
recover the data is to repeat the measurement. There are remedies for this, but QuikLook execu-
tion makes use of only about 3% the total capability of the Vision program. Vision is intended to
make it measurements within a DataSet.

IV.3 - DataSet Test Definition

Let's start with some terminology:

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 31

• Test Definition - A Test Definition is a sequence of Tasks that make up an experiment.
The Tasks are executed in their sequential order. (Advanced topics will provide excep-
tions to this.)

Figure 5 - A Hysteresis Test Definition with Filter Tasks.
• DataSet - A DataSet is a record, with associated database file, that contains Test Defini-
tions. A single Current Test Definition (CTD) is an experiment that is ready to execute.
The DataSet Archive contains any number of Executed Test Definitions (ETDs). These
are complete records of the previous execution of Test Definitions within a DataSet. An
open DataSet also includes a log window that contains a record of activity within the Da-
taSet.

Figure 6 - A DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 32

• DataSet Explorer - This is a window, normally located along the left border of Vision,
that contains a list of all DataSets registered to Vision. The DataSets are displayed in a
tree structure that represents the physical location of the DataSets on the Vision host
computer (or network) disk drive. Any number of DataSets may be opened. Each open
DataSet is represented by a tab in the DataSet Explorer window.

Figure 6 - DataSet Explorer Window.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 33

• TASK LIBRARY - This is a window that holds all Tasks available in Vision. Tasks are
identified by Vision on startup and loaded into this window in a tree structure based on
Task type. (A Task will never be more than three folders deep in the tree.) By default the
TASK LIBRARY is the center window along the right Vision border.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 34

Figure 7 - TASK LIBRARY Window.
• EDITOR - This is a window in which Test Definitions are constructed. Tasks are moved
from the TASK LIBRARY into the Editor, configured and appended to existing Tasks in
the Test Definition that is under construction in the EDITOR. By default this is the upper

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 35

window along the right Vision border.

Figure 8 - EDITOR Window.
The process begins by moving a Task from the TASK LIBRARY into the EDITOR. (In
somewhat more advanced discussion, complete Test Definitions can be moved to the ED-
ITOR from DataSets and the "Customized Tests" folder in the TASK LIBRARY.) Tasks
are moved by drag-and-drop or by right-clicking and selecting "To Editor".

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 36

Figure 9 - Hysteresis Task to EDITOR.
The configuration dialog opens. Configure the Task and click OK to add it to the EDITOR
Test Definition.

(Note: The Task is permanently stored in Vision under Task Name. Task Name should be
unique and descriptive. Comments also represent permanent documentation.)

(Note: The Hysteresis Task in this demonstration does not plot data on execution. There is no
plot configuration tab.)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 37

Figure 9 - Hysteresis Configuration and Append to EDITOR Test
Definition.
In this demonstration a Collect/Plot Filter Task is added to collect the Hysteresis Task data and
display it at runtime. Since the Collect/Plot Filter displays data at runtime it includes a configura-
tion tab and a plot configuration tab.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 38

Figure 10 - Add a Collect/Plot Filter Task.
With a Test Definition in the EDITOR, the next thing that is needed is a DataSet. The options for
creating the DataSet are shown in Figure 11. The DataSet is opened when created. Another op-
tion would be to operate the Test Definition in an existing open DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 39

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 40

Figure 11 - Create a New DataSet.
Now the Test Definition must be copied from the EDITOR into the DataSet Current Test Defini-
tion (CTD). This action also involves assigning a name to the CTD. The data will be permanent-
ly stored in an ETD based on this name. Therefore the name needs to be unique and meaningful.
The process is shown in Figure 12.

Figure 12 - EDITOR Test Definition to DataSet Current Test Defini-
tion (CTD).
The experiment is ready to run, as in Figure 13.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 41

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 42

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 43

Figure 13 - Run the CTD.
The execution can be repeated any number of times by repeating the procedures of Figure 13.
The data from any execution can be reviewed as shown in Figures 14 and 15.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 44

Figure 14 - Review the Hysteresis Task Configuration and Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 45

Figure 15 - Review the Collect/Plot Filter Task Configuration and
Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 46

V - Main Menu

A. File Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY, EDITOR,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 47

V.A - File Menu (Figure 2)

Figure 2 – The File Menu.

1. New DataSet – (Toolbar Icon: ) Create a new DataSet. A DataSet is a fundamental
Vision object and is discussed in detail below. This operation is mirrored by clicking the
white “page” icon on the toolbar. <Ctrl-N> is a hot key shortcut to this operation. The
New DataSet dialog will open.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 48

Figure 3 – New DataSet Dialog.
2. Minimize Graph Text Output - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to dis-
play minimized Task Text.
3. Standard Graph Text Output - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to dis-
play the normal Task Text.
4. Full Graph Text Output - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display
maximized Task Text.
5. Open a Test Definition Graph - This selection opens a standard Windows Browser Dialog
that can be used to navigate to a Test Definition Graph saved as a file. (*.grph file exten-
sion, by default.) Selecting the file and clicking Save will open the file in a new Test Def-
inition Graph window.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 49

Figure 4 - Open a Test Definition Graph.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 50

6. Open DataSet – This operation is performed with a DataSet selected in the Explorer.
Double-clicking a DataSet in the DataSet Explorer also opens it. The DataSet and Da-
taSet Explorer objects are described below. <Ctrl-O> also accesses this operation.
7. Print Setup... – This option opens a dialog in which the default printer configuration is set
(Figure 5). Vision offers Printing as an export option in each Task. Print configuration
applies to the print export function of all Tasks.

Figure 5 - Default Printer Configuration Setup Dialog.
8. Exit <F10>

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 51

B. Explorer Menu
V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.B - Explorer (Figure 2)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 52

Figure 2 – Explorer Menu

1. Register DataSet – (Toolbar Icon: ). Add an existing DataSet file (*.dst) to the Da-
taSet Explorer. A standard Windows file browser dialog will open. See Below.

Figure 3 – Register DataSet Dialog.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 53

2. Unregister DataSet – (Toolbar Icon: ). Remove a DataSet from the DataSet Explor-
er. Used as a housekeeping tool to reduce clutter. The DataSet file (*.dst) is not removed
and may be reregistered at any time. A dialog appears in which one or more DataSets can
be selected for Unregistering. Vision must be stopped and restarted for the changes to
take effect. See Below.

Figure 4 – Unregister DataSets.
3. Sort Explorer.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 54

Figure 5 – Sort Explorer Submenu.
1. By Name - DataSets will be organized alphabetically in the Explorer menus and sub-
menus. Repeated executions will toggle between low-to-high and high-to-low sorting.
2. By Create Date - DataSets will be organized by the original DataSet creation date in
the Explorer menus and submenus. Repeated executions will toggle between low-to-
high and high-to-low sorting. Note: This operation has errors that can result in the
loss of DataSet registration.
3. By Last Update Date - DataSets will be organized by the date of most-recent access
in the Explorer menus and submenus. Repeated executions will toggle between low-
to-high and high-to-low sorting. Note: This operation has errors that can result in
the loss of DataSet registration.

4. Search Explorer.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 55

Figure 6 – Search Explorer Submenu.
1. By Name <F3> - Locate the first instance of a registered DataSet, whose name con-
tains the specified text, in the DataSet Explorer. A search dialog opens.

Figure 7 – Search Explorer By Name Dialog.
2. By Create Date <Ctrl-F3> - Locate the first instance of a registered DataSet, created
on the specified date, in the DataSet Explorer. A search dialog opens as in Figure 8.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 56

Figure 8 – Search Explorer By Create Date/Last Update Dialog.
3. By Last Update Data <Alt-F3> - Locate the first instance of a registered DataSet, cre-
ated on the specified date, in the DataSet Explorer. A search dialog opens as in Fig-
ure 8.

4. Next <F4> - Repeat the previous search, locating the second, third, fourth or subse-
quent instance of a DataSet that meets the search specification.

5. Unregister Selected DataSet. Cause a DataSet that is highlighted in the DataSet Explorer
to be removed from the DataSet Explorer at the next instance of Vision.

6. Rename Selected DataSet. Permanently adjust the name of the DataSet that is highlighted
in the DataSet Explorer.. This is particularly useful if two registered DataSets have the
same name. DataSets of the same name are permitted by are bad practice and may result
in confusion or errors within Vision. A dialog will open.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 57

Figure 9– Rename a DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 58

C. View Menu

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen
V.C - View (Figure 2)

Figure 2 – View Menu.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 59

1. Toolbar <Shift-T> - Show or hide the Toolbar.
2. Status Bar <Shift-S> - Show or hide the Status Bar. Note that the status bar is used to
show the progress of Task execution for many Tasks. In some cases this will be the only
indication that there is activity.
3. Explorer <Shift-X> - Show or hide the DataSet Explorer Window – The DataSet Explor-
er is described below. Note that the Explorer window may be automatically hidden dur-
ing Test Definition execution and redisplayed when the experiment completes. This is
described below.
4. Editor <Shift-L>, Task Library and Documents - Show or hide the EDITOR, Library and
Document Library Windows – These windows are described below. Note that the three
windows may be automatically hidden during Test Definition execution and redisplayed
when the experiment completes. This is described below. These three windows are al-
ways either shown or hidden together as a unit.
5. Show Prompt Dialogs - Disabled by default. When enabled, various dialogs throughout
Vision will appear when certain actions are taken. For example, when an open DataSet is
closed, a prompt dialog will appear only if this option is enabled. The option may also be
enabled or disabled from the dialog.

Figure 3 – Example User Prompt Dialog.
6. Remove all Plot Windows <Ctrl-W> - Clear any and all data plot windows that may ap-
pear in the Vision User Area <Ctrl-W>. The User Area of the Vision program can be-
come very cluttered with displayed data. This device quickly cleans up the window.
7. Remove all Graph Windows <Ctrl-G> - Clear the User Area of any Test Definition
Graphs. This operation will close the windows without prompting to save the Graphs to
file.
8. Restore Window Position on Startup - Disabled by default. If disabled, Vision will al-
ways open with the EDITOR window above the Library Window to the right of the pro-
gram window and the DataSet Explorer window extending vertically to the left of the Vi-
sion program window. If this option is enabled, Vision will attempt to restore the docka-
ble windows to the position they held when the program was closed. Although this option
is available, window restoration has not yet been perfected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 60

D. Tools Menu

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.D - Tools (Figure 2)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 61

Figure 2 – Tools Menu.
1. Customize... – Allows some customization of the toolbar. This is a standard feature for
Windows programs and is of very limited value in Vision.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 62

Figure 3 – Toolbar Customization Dialog.
2. Hardware Refresh <Alt-W> - This option causes the hardware driver to reexamine the
number and type of Precision testers attached to the host computer. The program reopens
the Tester Selection dialog that appeared at Vision startup. The dialog shows the updated
suite of testers connected and allows the user to select a new tester for use or provide
names to the testers. This option should be exercised when the configuration of powered
testers attached to the host computer has been altered. This menu option should also be
used when the user needs to change the tester that will make the measurements, even
when no actual hardware configuration change has been made. Set topic III - Startup for
more detailed description of this dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 63

Figure 4 – Tester Selection Dialog.
3. Enable Drive Offset Compensation - Depending on measurement configuration, the test
voltage is applied to the sample at the DRIVE port at various ramp rates. Changing ramp
rates involves changes in hardware configuration. Each new configuration may apply a
constant offset error, so that if zero Volts are requested, the non-zero offset will be ap-
plied. An automatic offset detection for each ramp rate has been added to the Hardware
Driver. If this option is selected (normal, default and recommended condition), the Driver
will be told to correct the drive voltage by the offset. If this option is unchecked, the
Driver will not perform this correction. This application is especially important for the
Precision Premier II, Multiferroic and LC II testers.
4. Reload Editor Test Definition on Startup - Enabled by Default. If this option is selected,
any Test Definition (defined below) that was loaded into the EDITOR window when Vi-
sion was shut down will be reloaded into the EDITOR at startup. If this option is not ena-
bled, the EDITOR will always be empty on startup and any previous Test Definition in
the EDITOR will be lost.
5. Show Measurement Stop Button - Enabled by Default. Measurements can be stopped as
they are being made by the tester. During the measurement a Stop Measurement? button
will appear. If this menu selection is unchecked, the Stop Measurement? button will not
appear.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 64

Figure 5 – Measurement Stop Button.
6. Debug Logging - Disabled by default. If enabled, various actions in Vision will cause text
entries to be written to a file created at C:\Program Files\Radiant Technologies\Vision.
The file will have the date-unique file name "Vision Debug m(m).dd.yyyy.text". The
purpose of this option is to help RTI troubleshoot problem behavior that the user is re-
porting. This option should be disabled unless RTI requests that it be enabled. Once ena-
bled, the problem behavior should be recreated and the "Vision Debug
m(m).dd.yyyy.text" file should be sent to Radiant Technologies, along with one or more
DataSets that provide examples of the behavior, if possible.
7. Options... - Open a dialog that allows most of the Vision menu options to be configured
in a single location.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 65

1. Vision Startup and Misc.

Figure 6 - Options Dialog: Vision Startup and Miscellaneous Tab.
• Reload Editor Test Definition on Startup - If checked (default) the Test Definition
that was in the EDITOR when Vision was closed will be reloaded into the EDI-
TOR on Vision startup. The EDITOR is reloaded from C:\DataSets\Editor
List.EL. If this option is not checked, the EDITOR will be empty on Vision

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 66

startup.
• Restore Custom Windows Positions on Vision Startup - Unchecked by default. If
checked and Vision windows have been moved, undocked, etc. the user-adjusted
positions will be restored on the next Vision execution. If unchecked, the default
distribution of Vision windows will appear on startup.
• Show Vision 5 "What's New" Wizard on Vision Startup - Unchecked by default.
Vision will no longer display the Vision 5 "What's New" wizard on startup re-
gardless of this setting.
• Show Optional Prompts - Checked by default. Some Vision prompt dialogs may
be disabled by the user so that they no longer appear. This control toggles be-
tween showing and hiding these prompts.
• Test Definition Graph Resolution - "Standard" by default. This control determined
the amount of text to be written by each Task to a Test Definition Graph. In prac-
tice, adjustments to this control will have little or no effect.

2. Measurement and Test Definition Execution

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 67

Figure 7 - Options Dialog: Measurement and Execution Tab Tab.
• Signal Options: Enable Internal ±100.0-Volt, ±200.0-Volt or ±500.0-Volt Ampli-
fier if Available - Checked by default. This option has been withdrawn. Previously
the user could opt to turn off the internal amplifier for measurements of magni-
tude less than 10.0 Volts. This has been supplanted by driver control of the state
of the internal amplifier based on test conditions.
• Signal Options: Enable DRIVE Offset Compensation (To Correct for Constant
DRIVE Voltage Errors) - Checked by default. On Vision startup or hardware re-
fresh the tester is calibrated for voltage output deviations from zero-Volt output at
each of the various DRIVE signal stages. With this control checked, the offset of
the DRIVE signal stage used is subtracted from the ordered signal to correct for
the error to produce the requested signal. This option should normally be selected.
However, in some cases where problems are encountered, the engineers at Radi-
ant Technologies, Inc. may ask the user to disable this option.
• Execution Options: Abort the Test Definition on Tester Error - Checked by de-
fault. When this option is checked, any error returned to a Hardware Task (includ-
ing Measurement Tasks) by the driver will cause the Test Definition execution to
terminate at that Task. If the control is not checked, the Test Definition will con-
tinue to execute despite the error. Note that Error 9 will terminate the execution
regardless of the state of this control. Error 9 is returned when the user clicks the
Stop <Measurement>? button.
• Execution Options: Show the Manual Stop Button on Measurement Tasks -
Checked by default. When checked the execution of a Measurement Task will
show the Stop <Measurement>? button. This button allows the user to attempt to
stop the Task execution before the measurement is completed. If this control is
not checked the button will not appear.
• Execution Options: Enable Debug Logging - Unchecked by default. When
checked Tasks may output text to a file named C:\DataSets\Debugging\ Vision
Debug MM.DD.YYYY.txt. When troubleshooting problems remotely at the cus-
tomer's location, Vision engineers may ask the user to enable this option, run the
Task(s) to duplicate the problem and forward the resulting text file back to the en-
gineer. Otherwise, this control should remain unchecked.
• Vision Display Options: Close the Editor Window on Test Definition Execution -
Checked by default. When checked, the EDITOR window will be closed when
Vision is executing a Test Definition in a DataSet. The window will be reopened
when the execution completes.
• Vision Display Options: Close the Library Window on Test Definition Execution -
Checked by default. When checked, the Library window will be closed when Vi-
sion is executing a Test Definition in a DataSet. The window will be reopened
when the execution completes.
• Vision Display Options: Close the Documents Library Window on Test Definition
Execution - Checked by default. When checked, the Documents Library window

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 68

will be closed when Vision is executing a Test Definition in a DataSet. The win-
dow will be reopened when the execution completes.
• Vision Display Options: Close the DataSet Explorer Window on Test Definition
Execution - Unchecked by default. When checked, the DataSet Explorer window
will be closed when Vision is executing a Test Definition in a DataSet. The win-
dow will be reopened when the execution completes.
• Hysteresis-Based Task Point Limit - Set the maximum number of points available
to Hysteresis-based measurements (Hysteresis, Piezo, Remanent Hysteresis, etc.)
This number may be adjusted downward based on the configured parameters of
the measurement. Up to 32,000 points may be selected. Actual maximum may be
reduced based on the tester model as noted in the selection box.

3. DataSets

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 69

Figure 8 - Options Dialog: DataSets Tab.
• New DataSet: New DataSet and DataSet Register Default File Path -
"C:\DataSets\*.dst" by default. This is the file path to which DataSet files (*.dst)
will be located when new DataSets are created. This value will change as a new
file path is assigned when the DataSet is created.
• New DataSet: User's Initials - "" by default. These are the default user's initials
that are specified when a new DataSet is created. A two, three or four-character
string is required to be associated with a DataSet. This default value will change
as initials are changed during the creating of a DataSet.
• New DataSet: Folder- "" by default. This value is no longer used and the control

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 70

is not shown.
• New DataSet: Subfolder- "" by default. This value is no longer used and the con-
trol is not shown.
• Log Window: Automatically Clear the Log Window on Closing the DataSet -
Checked by default. When checked, all DataSets' log windows will be cleared of
all text when the DataSet is closed. The log window is often of little documenting
value and clearing it allows the DataSet to reopen more efficiently. Unchecking
this control disables Log Window: Automatically Save the Log Window Text Be-
fore Closing.
• Log Window: Automatically Save the Log Window Text Before Closing - Un-
checked by default. This control is disabled if Log Window: Automatically Clear
the Log Window on Closing the DataSet is unchecked. If checked, all of the text
in the a DataSet's log window will be written to C:\DataSets\Auto_Log\<DataSet
Name>.Log.MM.DD.YYYY - H(H).M(M).txt before the log window is cleared
of text, when the DataSet is closed. This option allows DataSet operation to re-
main efficient while maintaining the documentation offered by the log window.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 71

4. Exporting

Figure 9 - Options Dialog: Exporting Tab.
• Printing and Word Export: Header Only - Unchecked by default. When checked,
Word document exporting and printer exporting will not output columns of meas-
ured data vectors in Tasks that take data in vectors. This reduces the size of the
output in formats where columnar output is of little value. Unchecking this con-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 72

trol allows the output of columnar data.
• Printing: Vertical Space Between Lines - "100" by default. Adjust this value to
adjust line spacing the printer output. Proper spacing is a function of the printer
driver on the Vision host computer. The proper value to enter here is established
by trial-and-error.
• Printing: Horizontal Start Position- "100" by default. Adjust this value to adjust
left location of the first character on a line in the printer output. Proper location
specification is a function of the printer driver on the Vision host computer. The
proper value to enter here is established by trial-and-error.
• Printing: Horizontal Tab Distance - "200" by default. Adjust this value to adjust
spacing of columns in the printer output. Proper spacing is a function of the print-
er driver on the Vision host computer. The proper value to enter here is estab-
lished by trial-and-error.
• Text Export: Column Delimiter - "Tab" by default. Select the delimiter used to
separate columns of data in text exporting. The selection may determine the dis-
tribution of exported data if the text export is imported into a data analysis pro-
gram such as Excel or Origin.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 73

5. Data Plotting

Figure 10 - Options Dialog: Data Plotting Tab.
• Data Display Dialog: Show Data in a Tabbed Dialog for Laptops and Smaller
Displays - Unchecked by default. When unchecked, Measurement Tasks that dis-
play data in a Data Presentation dialog will show plotted and text data on a single
dialog page. This page may be too large for laptop displays and other small moni-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 74

tors. Checking this control separates the display of plotted data and text data into
two tabs in a tabbed dialog, allowing the size of the dialog to be reduced for
smaller displays. However, operating Vision with a display smaller than 19"
(49.25 cm) is not recommended.
• Data Display Dialog: Plot Grid - "None" by default. Select the grid that is to ap-
pear over the data display when data are first plotted. (The display can always be
adjusted by right-clicking.)
• Data Display Dialog: Plot Style - "Line" by default. Select the visual representa-
tion that the data are to take on when first displayed. (The display can always be
adjusted by right-clicking.)
• Data Display Dialog: Plot Text Font Size - "Medium" by default. Select the size
of the text of the labels that appear on the data display when data are first plotted.
(The display can always be adjusted by right-clicking.)
• Data Display Dialog: Mark Data Points - Unchecked by default. When checked,
each data point in a line display will be marked with a cicular point. This can
dramatically clutter the display. (The display can always be adjusted by right-
clicking.)
• Data Display Dialog: Show Data Labels - Unchecked by default. When checked,
each data point the display will be accompanied by numeric text showing the
point's X and Y axis values. This can dramatically clutter the display. (The dis-
play can always be adjusted by right-clicking.)
• Data Manipulation: Smooth Data - Unchecked by default. When checked, for
Hysteresis data representations that allow weighted moving average smoothing
before plotting (primarily derivative representations) the smoothing will occur..
This control has no relevance to most data presentation.
• Data Manipulation: Subsample Data - Unchecked by default. When checked, for
Hysteresis data representations that data to be subsampled by selected every
fourth point before plotting (primarily derivative representations) the subsampling
will occur.. This control has no relevance to most data presentation.
• Hysteresis Plot Filter Default : - Plot "Centered" checked by default. This set of
check boxes allows the user to select which Hysteresis plot filter will be set, by
default, before data plotting. The selection may be changed by adjusting the Filter
control in the plot configuration dialog that appears immediately before plotting.
Plot "Centered" is the default and is the most-common representation of Hystere-
sis data. Plot Polarization Vs Time is the option most commonly selected by Ra-
diant Technologies, Inc. engineers.

6. Fixed Trouble Report Info - Establish customer details required when submitting an
automatic trouble report. Automatic Trouble Reports are initiated under the Help
menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 75

Figure 11 - Options Dialog: Fixed Trouble Report Information Tab.
• Set Parameter Limits - This functionality is not yet available.

• Run DVM - This option is available in the icon on the toolbar. This option
2
runs tool that collects RTI I C Voltage Controller input voltage as a Digital Volt-
meter (DVM). At this writing no I2C Voltage Controller is available to allow a
demonstration.

• Set PID Limits - This option opens a dialog that allows the user to set the propor-
tional (Kp), integral (Ki) and differential (Kd) parameters to control the thermal
rate of the RTI HVDM II high-voltage thermal displacement meter. Use of this

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 76

control is not recommended for anyone who is not familiar with the operation of
PID controllers.

Figure 12 - PID Limits Dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 77

E. QuikLook Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.F - QuikLook (Figure 2)– Perform the following Tasks independently of a DataSet for a
quick sampling. ( See Below ) The QuikLook menu has been divided into categories to make or-
ganization easier. (Note that the "Repeat Last Task" option is disabled. This is a bug that needs
correction. However, the action can be taken by pressing <Ctrl-R> as indicated in the menu la-
bel.)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 78

.
Figure 2 - Root QuikLook Menu.
1. Repeat Last Task (Ctrl + R) - There is an option to repeat the last configured QuikLook
Task using <Ctrl-R>. Since the menu has been subdivided into categories, this option has
been disabled in the menu. However, the <Ctrl-R> key combination still operates as in-
tended.

2. Hysteresis-Based Tasks. These are Tasks derived from the basic Hysteresis measurement.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 79

Figure 3 - Hysteresis-Based Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 80

3. Pulse Tasks - These are Tasks that measure and/or preset the sample using stepped volt-
ages.

Figure 4 - Pulsed Tasks.
4. CV/Leakage/Parasitics - This submenu contains miscellaneous Measurement Task.

Figure 5 - Miscellaneous Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 81

5. Hardware Signal Tasks. These are Tasks that do not take measured data.

Figure 6 - Hardware Signal Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 82

6. Tester Info/Acc. Read/Read Sensor. These are Tasks that report the current status of the
tester, including the voltage(s) at the SENSOR port(s).

Figure 7 - Tester Status Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 83

7. External Instrument Tasks. Until recently this category was called GPIB Tasks. This
menu contains Tasks that talk to external instruments not manufactured by Radiant Tech-
nologies, Inc. Most communication is still through a National Instruments GPIB inter-
face. However, some Tasks include instruments that are connected through RS232,
RS485 or USB buses. Therefore the name of this menu has been changed.

Figure 8 - External Instrument Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 84

8. Import Tasks - These two "Filter" Tasks import data from text files exported by RT66A
and RT6000 tester programs.

Figure 9 - RT66A and RT6000 Data Import Filter Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 85

9. User Variable Tasks. Only the "Create User Variable" Task is available in QuikLook.

Figure 10 - Create User Variable Task.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 86

10. Piezo-Electric Tasks. These are Tasks designed to capture sample displacement and/or
other piezo-electric properties

Figure 11 - Piezo-Electric Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 87

11. Transistor Tasks - Only the Transistor Current Task is available under the QuikLook
menu.

Figure 12 - Transistor Task.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 88

12. Magneto-Electric Tasks - These Tasks are grouped into submenus under two upper sub-
menus. The Magneto-Electric bundle has been shipped in two different formats. The ear-
lier bundles were shipped with a Kepco BOP 36 current amplifier. More recent bundles
are being shipped with the Radiant Technologies, Inc. CS 2.5 current source. These two
bundles have distinct, though very similar, sets of Tasks. Each set is assigned its own
submenu.

Figure 13 - Magneto-Electric Groups.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 89

13. Magneto-Electric Tasks->Kepco.

Figure 14 - Magneto-Electric->Kepco Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 90

14. Magneto-Electric Tasks->Radiant Current Source 2.5

Figure 15 - Magneto-Electric->CS 2.5 Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 91

15. Radiant Technologies In-House Tasks. This is a menu category reserved for Tasks
that are used by Radiant Technologies, Inc. engineers. These Tasks are not distributed
to customers and this menu will be empty.

Figure 16 – Radiant Technologies In-House Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 92

F. EDITOR Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 93

V.F - Editor (Figure 2) – Perform operations on the EDITOR window. This menu is also avail-
able by right-clicking in the EDITOR window. Some options are disabled if the EDITOR win-
dow is empty.

Figure 2 – Editor Menu.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 94

Go to EDITOR Topic

1. Test Definition to Current DataSet - Move the Test Definition that is in the EDITOR
to open DataSet replacing the Current Test Definition (CTD). The option is disabled
if the EDITOR is empty of Tasks. A warning appears if there are no open DataSets
to receive the Test Definition. If there are two or more open DataSets, a dialog ap-
pears to allow the target DataSet to be selected. Once the Test Definition has been
transferred, a dialog will appear to allow the CTD to be named or renamed.

Figure 3 – Various CTD Transfer Conditions.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 95

2. Test Definition to Customized Test Folder - This option moves the existing Test Defini-
tion into a single named entry in the Task Library under the Customized Tests folder. The
entire Test Definition can then be recalled from the Library as though it were a single
Task. This option is disabled if there are no Tasks in the EDITOR. A dialog appears that
allows the Customized Test to be given a unique and meaningful name of up to 25 char-
acters.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 96

Figure 4 – Test Definition to Customized Test.
3. Remove Last Task (Ctrl-L) - Clear the last Task appended to the Test Definition in the
EDITOR. This option is disabled if there are no Tasks in the EDITOR.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 97

Figure 5 – Remove the Last Task in the EDITOR Test Definition.
4. Clear All – Remove all Tasks from the Test Definition under construction in the EDITOR
window. This option is disabled if there are no Tasks in the EDITOR.

Figure 6 – Remove All Tasks in the EDITOR Test Definition.
5. Minimize Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display min-
imal Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text output.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 98

6. Standard Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display the
normal Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text out-
put.
7. Full Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display maximal
Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text output.
8. Graph Editor Test Definition - Causes the Test Definition currently in the EDITOR to be
display in a Graph window. The Test Definition Graph can be copied for pasting into Mi-
crosoft word or Excel. It can be edited, printed and saved for recall into Vision,

Figure 7 - Editor Test Definition Graphic.
9. Assign Parameters - This option opens a dialog that allows a number of common, global
parameters to be immediately updated among all Tasks in the Test Definition. This is a
convenient tool when, for example, changing a sample requires sample Area (cm2) and
Thickness (µm) to be changed in all Measurement Tasks in the Test Definition. Parame-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 99

ters are selected for adjustment and their new values are specified. On closing the dialog,
the change takes effect.

1. Sample Parameters: Entries are clear and need no further discussion.

Figure 8 - Global EDITOR Sample Parameter Adjustment.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 100

2. Measurement Parameters: Entries are clear and need no further discussion.

Figure 9 - Global EDITOR Measurement Parameter Adjustment.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 101

3. Plot Titles

Figure 10 - Global EDITOR Plot Titles Adjustment.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 102

10. Editor Aide - Also accessible using the icon on the toolbar. Open the Editor Aide
dialog. Use this dialog to build Test Definitions and modify sequencing of Tasks in the
existing EDITOR Test Definition. This is a sophisticated tool presented in Tutorial XII or
Main Manual Topic XV.

Figure 11 - Initial Editor Aide Dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 103

G. DataSet Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 104

V.G - DataSet (Figure 2) - Perform operations on and/or configure the selected DataSet. This
menu is also available by selecting the Current Test Definition (CTD) name and right-clicking. If
no DataSet is open, most of the menu options are disabled. "Data Mining", "ETD Transfer" and
"Simple Measurement" are processes that can be initiated without an open DataSet.

Figure 2 - DataSet Operation Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 105

1. CTD to Editor (<Shift-E> Hotkey) - Return the CTD in the currently active DataSet to
the EDITOR. The Test Definition will be appended to any Tasks already in the EDITOR.

Figure 3 - CTD to EDITOR.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 106

2. CTD to UDT (<Shift-U> Hotkey) - Create a Customized Test in the Library using the
CTD in the currently active DataSet.

Figure 4 - CTD to Customized Test.
3. Close Editor on Execute (Alt-E) - Checked by Default. Enable or disable the hiding of
the EDITOR window when a Test Definition is executed. This feature allows more room
on the User Area of the Vision window for the display of data. The window will reappear
when the execution is complete.

4. Close Task Library on Execute - Checked by Default - Enable or disable the hiding of the
Task Library window when a Test Definition is executed. This feature allows more room
on the User Area of the Vision window for the display of data. The window will reappear

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 107

when the execution is complete.

5. Close Document Library on Execute - Checked by Default - Enable or disable the hiding
of the Document Library window when a Test Definition is executed. This feature allows
more room on the User Area of the Vision window for the display of data. The window
will reappear when the execution is complete.

6. Close Explorer on Execute (Alt-X) - Unchecked by Default - Enable or disable the hiding
of the Explorer window when a Test Definition is executed. This feature allows more
room on the User Area of the Vision window for the display of data. The window will re-
appear when the execution is complete.

7. Execute Current Test Definition (CTD) (F1) – Run the Current Test Definition (CTD) in
the open DataSet , storing the execution and results in the DataSet Archive . <F1> is a
shortcut.

8. Minimize Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display min-
imized Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text out-
put.

9. Standard Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display the
normal Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text out-
put.

10. Full Graph Text - Cause future instances of a Test Definition Graph to display maxim-
ized Task Text. These three options have little or no practical effect on Task Text output.

11. Graph CTD - Causes the Current Test Definition of the upper-most open DataSet to be
displayed in a Graph window.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 108

Figure 5 - Graph of the Current Test Definition.

12. Data Mining – (Toolbar Icon: ) - Initiate Data Mining. See Tutorial XI.A or Main
Manual XVI for complete details.

13. ETD Transfer – (Toolbar Icon: ) - Initiate ETD Transfer. See Tutorial XI.B or
Main Manual XVII for complete details.

14. Simple Measurement – (Toolbar Icon: ) - Initiate ETD Transfer. See Tutorial XI.C
or Main Manual XVIII for complete details.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 109

H. Library Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.H - Library (Figure 2)

1. Delete Customized Test – Select one or more Customized Tests from a list of all Custom-
ized Tests in the Library and delete them completely. The dialog of Figure 20 appears.
Customized Tests are Test Definitions that have been saved for reuse as a single Task in
the Library under the "Customized Tests" folder. Note that Customized Tests were
originally called User-Defined Tests. The acronym UDT will still appear in some
places within Vision.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 110

Figure 2 – Library Menu.

Figure 3 – Customized Test Selection Dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 111

I. Data Plotting Menu
V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.I - Data Plotting (Figure 2, etc.).

This menu provides the user an opportunity to preconfigure the format plotted data will appear
in. Entries that are particularly useful are the Plotting Method and the Grid Line selections.

1. Plotting Method - Select the format under which the data points will be displayed. " Line"
is default.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 112

Figure 2 – Data Plotting: Plotting Method Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 113

2. Grid Line - Select which Grid presentation, if any, will appear. Select the Grid line style.
" None" and "Thick Solid" are default".

Figure 3 - Data Plotting: Grid Line Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 114

3. Font Size - Select the size of the text that appears on the plot. " Medium" is default.

Figure 4 - Data Plotting: Font Size Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 115

4. Auto/Manual Axes Scaling. Selecting this option opens a dialog that allows the X- and
Y-Axis scaling to be independently configured to automatically scale to the data or to
take on a user-specified set of limits. Default for both Axes is automatic scaling.

Figure 5 - Data Plotting: Axis Scaling.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 116

5. Axis Color - Clicking this option opens a dialog that allows colors to be assigned to the
various plot data traces by index. The operation of this dialog is not yet well defined.

Figure 6 - Data Plotting: Data Trace Color.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 117

6. Show Data Labels - Unchecked by default. When checked plotted data will be accompa-
nied by the numeric X- and Y-Axis values, to three decimals, for each data point. This
option is really only effective for zoomed data.

Figure 7 - Data Plotting: Show Data Labels.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 118

7. Mark Data Points - Unchecked by default.When checked plotted data will be marked by a
small dot on the plot.

Figure 8 - Data Plotting: Mark Data Points.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 119

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 120

J. Log Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.J - Log (Figure 2 )

Perform actions and configure automatic actions for the DataSet Log Window.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 121

Figure 2 - Log Operations Menu
1. Clear Log - Permanently remove all text from the log window. It may be a good idea to
save the Log to a file before clearing if the information in the window is useful. New text
will be generated as operations are performed on the DataSet. This option is disabled if
there is no open DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 122

Figure 3 - Clear the Log Window.
2. Print Log - Send the content of the Log Window to the printer. This operation opens the
printer setup dialog. This option is disabled if there is no open DataSet.

3. Save Entire Log to File - Store the entire contents of the Log Window into a text file.
This option is disabled if there is no open DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 123

Figure 4 - Complete Log Backup.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 124

4. Save Selected Log to File - Store highlighted text only to a text file. This option is disa-
bled if there is no open DataSet. Note: As shown in the figure, this function is not op-
erating properly. A subset of text other than the selected subset has been exported.
This is a bug.

Figure 5 - Selected Log Backup.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 125

5. Find Text (Ctrl-F) - This feature opens a dialog (Figure 6) in which the user enters text
to be searched for in the Log window. The search may either be case sensitive, or ignore
case. When the text is found, the Log window is scrolled to the page and a dialog appears
indicating the text line number (Figure 7). This option is disabled if there is no open Da-
taSet.

Figure 6 - Search For Text in the Log Window.

Figure 7 - Text Located in the Log Window.
6. Find Next (Alt-F) - Find the next occurrence of the previously specified text in the Log
window. This option is disabled if there is no open DataSet.

7. Clear Log on DataSet Close->Clear Log on DataSet Close - Checked by default. When
checked, the log window is cleared of all text each time a DataSet is closed. The text in a
DataSet log window may be found to be of limited documentary benefit. Clearing the log
can speed DataSet opening since the text does not need to be rewritten to the window.
When this control is checked, Clear Log on DataSet Close->Save Log Before Clear will
be enabled. Otherwise that option is disabled.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 126

8. Clear Log on DataSet Close->Save Log Before Clear - Unchecked by default. When
checked, the contents of the DataSet log window will be entirely written to a file named
C:\DataSets\Auto_Log\<DataSet Name>.(M)M.(D)D.YYYY - (H)H.(M)M before the
text is cleared from the log window. This archives the documentation that the log window
provides.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 127

K. Calculator Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.K - Calculator (Figure 2)

This option open a dialog ( Figure 3 ) that allows one of five ferroelectric parameters to be de-
rived from use-specified values entered in the other four. See Step-by-Step for details.

Figure 2 - Calculator Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 128

Figure 3 - Calculator Default Dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 129

L. Help Menu

V: Main Menu Operations
When the Vision program starts up four dockable windows - TASK LIBRARY , EDITOR ,
Document Library and DataSet Explorer – appear at the edges of a larger empty user space
(Figure 1). At the top of the program view is a menu with the following options. These are dis-
cussed in subsequent sections. Links are made to the sections.

Figure 1 – Vision Program Screen.
V.L - Help (Figure 2)

Show this Help program or the “About” dialog or initiate an automatic help report. Please visit
the Radiant Technologies, Inc. web site at www.ferrodevices.com frequently to download updat-
ed Vision software and updated and new tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 130

Figure 2 – Help Menu
1. About Vision... – (Toolbar Icon: ) - Get up-to-date information about your Vision
installation.

Figure 3 – About Vision.

2. Help Topics – (Toolbar Icon: ) - Launch this help document.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 131

Figure 4 – Main Help Browser.
3. Trouble Report - This menu option opens a trouble report wizard that allows you to pro-
vide Radiant Technologies, Inc. engineers detailed information about problems that you
are having. During the course of the wizard an analysis DataSet will be automatically
created and executed and the trouble report, along with the DataSet, will be automatically
emailed to Radiant Technologies, Inc. Note that a Precision tester must be attached and
powered to run the Trouble Report Wizard. If no tester is attached, a message appears:

Figure 5 - No Tester Attached - Wizard Will Not Run.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 132

1. General Information - This wizard page is used to provide automatic, required and
optional information about you, your tester, your Vision version and your operating
system to the Radiant Technologies, Inc. engineers. Note that the Windows operating
system version selection is limited to Windows 7, 8, 8.1 and 10. Windows 2000, XP
and Vista is are longer supported. If you are operating Windows 8, 8.1 or 10, please
select Windows 7 until this control is updated. Note that, once entered, the infor-
mation in this dialog is written to the registry and need not be re-entered. This infor-
mation can also be provided in the Tools->Options...->Fixed Trouble Report menu
location.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 133

Figure 5 – Trouble Report Tab 1 - General Information.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 134

3. Problem Description - The user is guided to describe the problem as he/she best un-
derstands it. These are the questions that the Radiant engineer will ask when the prob-
lem is presented.

Figure 6 – Trouble Report Tab 2 - Formatted Error Information.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 135

3. Problem Description (Detailed) - Provide as detailed a description of the problem as
possible. Include, as appropriate, sample description, method of connection to the
sample, test configuration conditions, observed behaviour, etc. Attach any single file
that may help illustrate the problem. In particular, images that show experimental
configuration, errors, error data or data that are not understood, etc. are of value to the
RTI engineers.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 136

Figure 7 – Trouble Report Tab 3 - Detailed Error Information.
4. Create a DataSet - The automated Vision Trouble Report can be configured to make a
standard 5.0-Volt/10.0 ms Hysteresis measurement on the 1.0 nF internal reference
capacitor, store the measurement in a DataSet and attach the DataSet file to the email
to Radiant Technologies, Inc. This is a basic analysis Radiant engineer will often re-
quest in troubleshooting. As part of this process, the user will be afforded the oppor-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 137

tunity to append a single measurement to this DataSet that shows an example of the
error. This is the most valuable tool that RTI engineers have to evaluate the configu-
ration and results of the error measurement and to validate that basic measurements
are operating correctly.

Figure 8 – Trouble Report Tab 4 - Automated Tester Evaluation
DataSet.
Set Initials and add Comments (if desired). Click Execute . A DataSet named "RTI
Trouble Report:x" will be created and opened. A 5.0-Volt/10.0 ms Hysteresis Task
will be configured and executed, measuring the 1.0 nF Internal Reference Capacitor.
A dialog will appear to name the CTD and the ETD in the DataSet Archive. Assign

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 138

an appropriate name to the CTD and click OK . The DataSet Archive will be updated.

Figure 9 – Operate the Automated Tester Evaluation DataSet.
NOTE: You may Skip this step. This is not recommended if an example of the
error can be generated in a Task, or Test Definition, in a DataSet. If this step is
skipped, the next wizard tab will not appear.

5. Custom Test - If the DataSet of the previous tab was created and executed, this tab al-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 139

lows you to configure a Test Definition that demonstrates the error, so that error re-
sults will be recorded to the DataSet. Create the Test Definition, move into the Da-
taSet and execute as though the Trouble Report wizard were not open.

Figure 10 – Trouble Report Tab 5 - Guidelines for Custom Error-
Generating Test Definition Execution in the DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 140

Figure 11 – Results of Custom Error-Generating Test Definition Ex-
ecution in the DataSet.
If the user is not familiar with DataSet operations, each of the steps in this process
has a button on the wizard dialog that will open a help page to guide the user in that

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 141

step.

Figure 12 – Access to Help Operating the Custom Test Definition.
Click Next > to close the DataSet and move to the final wizard page. This step can be
skipped completely by immediately clicking Next > .

6. Transmit Report - This final wizard page can be used to automatically email the re-
port and the DataSet and attached file to Radiant Technologies, Inc. for review by the
engineers. If the host computer is not an email client, is not connected to the Internet
or if the attempt to email produces errors, the report can be saved, along with the at-
tachments and emailed manually by the user. The Save button can be used to save the
error report text even if the mail is succesfully transmitted.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 142

Figure 13 – Trouble Report Tab 6 - Transmit the Trouble Report.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 143

VI - Library and Tasks

VI: The Library Window and Tasks
To the center right (in its default position) of the program space is the Library window (Figure
1). It currently holds five folders named “Filters”, “Hardware”, "Parasitics" and “Program Con-
trol”. A fifth folder named “Customized Tests” will appear as the user adds custom Tasks,
known as Customized Tests, to the Library. (Vision ships with example Customized Tests in-
stalled, so this window will normally also appear.) Some folders contain subfolders and even
subsubfolders. All folders contain Tasks . Each Task is represented by an icon and a descriptive
name. No Task will ever appear more than three folders deep in the Library hierarchy.

Tasks that are loaded into the QuikLook menu are also labeled " (QL)" appended to their names
in the Library. QuikLook configuration and execution of these Tasks may be done by double-
clicking the Task in the Library.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 144

Figure 1 – Library Window with Expanded Task Menu.
Tasks are individual experimental programs provided by Radiant Technologies, Inc. Each Task
performs a specific operation. These Tasks may be arranged sequentially in nearly any order and
number to create an experiment, known as a Test Definition. Currently more than 120 Tasks are
provided with the Vision software. (All users are provided with Custom Tasks that can be con-
figured and reviewed. These Tasks must be purchased to be executed and include the Chamber,
Piezoelectric, Magnetoelectric and Transistor Task Suites, among others.) One or more addition-
al Tasks may be provided by Radiant Technologies to detect and correct certain hardware errors
when reported. More are planned and will be available on our web site. Tasks are installed or
updated simply by writing the Task file (a file with a *.vlr extension) into the "C:\Program Files
(x86)\Radiant Technologies\Vision\System" directory. The Task help file is written to
"C:\Program Files (x86)\Radiant Technologies\Vision\Help". Tasks currently fall into four main
categories represented by the folders in the Library. Many also fall into subcategories or subsub-
categories. Tasks will not be installed more than three levels deep in the Library. More detail
specific to each Task described below can be found by clicking on the Click For Task Instruc-
tions button of the Task’s configuration page(s).

It is important to regard the Vision software as a collection of programs including the main Vi-
sion program and all of the Tasks. Tasks, in other words, should be regarded as individual pro-
grams. The main Vision program provides the framework in which the Tasks operate. It provides
the TASK LIBRARY, EDITOR and DataSet Explorer windows. It manages Test Definition
creation and execution and maintains the database. As individual programs Tasks can be added,
deleted or updated independently of each other and of the Vision program. Vision changes rela-
tively slowly. Tasks, on the other hand may be added and updated on nearly a daily basis. Tasks
are independently versioned. With the release of an updated Vision version (5.13.0, for exam-
ple), all Tasks are also set to the Version (5.13.0). However, once released, the Task Version
numbers will begin to change as changes are made and new Task Versions released. Vision will
update its minor version (5.13.1, 5.13.2, etc.) independently of any Task and at each new release
of the program.

Task types are associated with type-dependent icons in the Task Library (and in all Test Defini-
tions). In some cases the icons are Task-specific. The icons are shown with the Tasks in the lists
below. Also shown, at the end of the Task discussion, is a link to the Task-specific Help project.
That project will provide much more detail about Task theory, configuration and execution.

Tasks marked with "(QL)" are also loaded into the QuikLook menu. These can be configured
and executed in QuikLook mode, from the TASK LIBRARY, by double-clicking or right-
clicking and selecting "QuikLook Execute". Note that, in general, Hardware and Measurement
Tasks are found in the QuikLook menu. However, Long-Duration Measurement Tasks do not
meet the philosophy of a quick "Let's see what we've got" execution under QuikLook. These also
take a lot of data over an extended time. They are, therefore, not included in the QuikLook menu.
The exception is the Advanced C/V Task. There is no particular reason that it is found in Qui-
kLook, but it has been included in that menu option from the beginning of Vision and has not
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 145

been removed. A few diagnostic Tasks are found only in QuikLook.

The following section summarizes all Tasks that are, distributed with Vision.

VI.1: Hardware Tasks
Hardware Tasks are those Tasks that communicate with the Precision Family stimulus and
measurement hardware. These provide direct stimulus to the sample under test. Three Tasks fall
directly into this category.

1. DC Bias (QL) ( ) - This Task applies a continuous DC voltage stress to the sample
for a pre-determined period of time. A progress dialog appears during the stress period
to indicate the stress duration. The DC Bias may be abbreviated by clicking the Cancel
button of the progress dialog. If not cancelled, the stressing voltage will be returned to
zero volts at the end of the delay period. The delay period may be altered in a Branch
Loop (discussed below) by incrementing it or scaling it. DC Bias voltage may also be
adjusted in a Branch Loop. In a Branch Loop, an Abort Loop button may be used to
cancel the DC Bias and prevent the subsequent Branch Task from returning execution
to its Branch Target regardless of the Branch Logic Condition.

2. Sync Enable/Disable (QL) ( ) - Under normal circumstances, when a Measurement
Task is making a measurement, the tester SYNC port is set to 3.3 Volts. This Task will
enable, disable or toggle that output. Disabling the SYNC port output allows the user to
incorporate a Sync Trigger Task that will pulse the SYNC port output to 3.3 Volts for a
user-specified pulse width. That allows the SYNC port to be used to trigger external
devices.
3. Sync Trigger (QL) ( ) - This Task will pulse the SYNC port to 3.3 Volts for a user-
specified period to allow Vision to trigger external instruments. The Sync Ena-
ble/Disable Task will normally be used before this Task to disable the SYNC port. That
keeps other Measurement Tasks from applying the SYNC trigger during the measure-
ment.

4. Waveform (QL) ( ) - This Task applies a periodic stress signal to the sample for a
pre-determined period of time. The signal may be a Sine, a Square Wave, a Triangle or
a Pulse Train, with two pulses per cycle of independent voltage. An external stimulus
or a custom profile read directly as voltages from a file may be used to create the stress
waveform. A progress dialog appears during the stress to indicate the stress duration.
The Waveform may be abbreviated by clicking the Cancel button of the progress dia-
log. The delay period may be altered in a Branch Loop (discussed below) by increment-
ing it or scaling it. Waveform voltage and frequency may also be altered in a Branch
Loop. In a Branch Loop, an Abort Loop button may be used to cancel the Waveform
and prevent the subsequent Branch Task from returning execution to its Branch Target
regardless of the Branch Logic Condition.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 146

Some Hardware Tasks are unique in that they appear only in the QuikLook menu and do not in-
teract with a sample. QuikLook entries do not associate icons with the Tasks.

5. Tester Information - A Task that appears only in the QuikLook menu. The Task reads
tester-identifying information from the tester hardware and displays it on a dialog.
Comments may then be added and the information exported. The utility is to provide
Radiant Technologies information that will assist in troubleshooting the Tester when
there is a problem report.

6. Accessory Read - This Task reads the contents of the EEPROMs of all accessory in-
struments - High Voltage Interfaces (HVIs), High Voltage Amplifiers (HVAs) and/or
48-Channel Multiplexers currently attached to the Precision tester. This information is
reported in detail and may be exported. This allows the user and/or Radiant Technolo-
gies, Inc. to verify that logic communications between instruments is occurring as ex-
pected and that the EEPROMs are properly programmed.

VI.1.1: External Instruments
External Instruments Tasks are Hardware Tasks that communicate with external acces-
sory instrumentation that may or may not be provided by Radiant Technologies, Inc.
Most instruments are controlled using a National Instruments General Purpose Interface
Bus and the IEEE-488 software standard. However some instruments are controlled
over RS232, RS485 or USB buses. Tasks will include interaction with specific instru-
ments such as probe stations and thermal devices (hot chucks and chambers) as well as
more generic communications that can be associated with any instrument. Users who
wish to control GPIB devices must insert and configure a National Instruments GPIB
board in their tester host computer. Some Measurement Tasks, listed below, also com-
municate to instruments using the IEEE-488 GPIB or other standard.

NOTE that National Instruments continues to provide installed GPIB interface
boards that will provide outstanding service to these Tasks. However, given the
portability of the Vision program, Radiant Technologies, Inc. recommends the Na-
tional Instruments GPIB-USB-HS interface. This is a GPIB connector on a cable
with a USB connector at the other end. It can be easily moved between computer
hosts. (Each host must have the NI-488.2 software installed.)

NOTE that the GPIB interface hardware used must be 100% compatible with the
National Instruments NI-488.2 drivers. In particular, Radiant Technologies is
aware of GPIB interfaces produced by Keithley. These interfaces are not compati-
ble with Vision.

1. Generic GPIB (QL) ( ) - This Task can be used to communicate to any external
device that supports the IEEE-488 GPIB parallel communications standard. It can
be accessed from the QuikLook menu or may be programmed into a Test Definition
. The Task allows the user to send commands, receive responses or combine the two

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 147

operations into a query. As a generic interface, it cannot react to responses from the
instruments under control. However, instrument response is written to the "GPIB
Response String" User Variable where it could be used to control Branching, etc.

2. GPIB Start ( ) - This Task renders the Vision host computer a slave on a GPIB
bus controlled by a separate host. (Note that the Vision host must have its GPIB
System Controller capabilities disabled.) The Task will normally appear as the first
Task in the Test Definition. On execution a dialog will appear and the Task will
wait for either a "Start" or "Abort" signal from the GPIB system controller. The
Test Definition will proceed or stop based on this signal. The Test Definition may
also be started or stopped by clicking buttons on the dialog box. Please see the Task
description for more details.

3. LCR Meter (QL) ( ) - This Task configures an Agilent or Wayne-Kerr LCR
meter to measure at the user's specifications. A selection of two LCR properties: In-
ductance, Capacitance, Q-Factor, Dissipation Factor, Resistance, Reactance, Im-
pedance, admittance, Susceptance, Conductance, Theta can be returned as the
measured value. In the Wayne-Kerr instrument, the data may also be returned as a
vector function of a frequency sweep.

4. Quantum Design PPMS/Dyancool (QL) ( ) - This Task is specific to the
Quantum Design PPMS and Dynacool models of cryochambers. The Task runs
simultaneously with a Task-specific script run by the Quantum Design MultiVu
program. This Task is in beta release and requires feedback from the Quantum De-
sign users for final approval. The Task offers control over temperature, temperature
ramp rate, magnetic field and magnetic field ramp rate. Quantum Design thermal
controllers originally communicated over the GPIB bus and older models are still
incorporated into the Set Temperature, Read Temperature and Set Field Tasks. Lat-
er models are USB controlled and offer the MultiVu scripting that is used by this
Tasks. Communication may be entirely performed on the Vision host computer or
may be performed using a script that is written and read over a LAN.

5. Read Temperature (QL) ( ) - This Task can be used to communicate to a ther-
mal controller such as a hot chuck or chamber. It repeatedly reads, stores and dis-
plays the current temperature (°C). Normally the temperature is read automatically,
with a possible user-programmed delay between updates until a) a user-
programmed number of reads is reached, b) the user aborts the process or c) a user-
specified time interval has been reached. A fourth option exists in which the sam-
pling is performed manually each time the user clicks a sample button, until the user
clicks an abort button. This Task only controls specific thermal instruments that
have had drivers programmed into Vision. Other instruments may be added - at ad-
ditional expense - as they are required by customers.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 148

6. Set Field (QL)( ) - This Task is specific to older model Quantum Design ther-
mal controllers that communicate over a GPIB bus. This Task is used to set the
magnetic field and magnetic field ramp rate on a Quantum Design Cryochamber.

7. Set Temperature (QL) ( ) - This Task can be used to communicate to a thermal
controller such as a hot chuck or chamber. It will command the controller to a spe-
cific set temperature, and then sample the current temperature until it is within a us-
er-specified tolerance of the set temperature. At that time the Task may exit. The
Task may also enter a "stability" phase as described in the next paragraph. If the
Task is programmed to exit immediately, it is recommended that the Task be fol-
lowed by an extended Delay Task to allow time for the thermal device to settle.
This Task may also be used to set the ramp rate (°C/min.) of some of the thermal
device. Ramp Rate is currently available only for a subset of the programmed ther-
mal controllers. This Task only controls specific thermal instruments that have had
drivers programmed into Vision. Other instruments may be added - at additional
expense - as they are required by customers.

The Set Temperature Task offer a "stability" option. If the user enables this option,
the Task attempts to determine temperature stability. Each time the detected tem-
perature moves to within the tolerance of the set temperature, the Task sets a timer.
After that, each time the Task detects a temperature that is outside the tolerance, the
timer is reset. The timer is set and reset until a sequence of detected temperatures
remains within the tolerance for a period of time programmed by the user. At that
point, the Task assumes temperature stability and terminates. The temperature pro-
gress dialog includes red and green indicators that indicate whether or not the most-
recently read temperature is within the tolerance of the set temperature. This option
is also available to the QD PPMS/Dynacool and Set Field Tasks.

VI.1.2: I2C DAC
This series of Tasks is intended for use with the Radiant Technologies, Inc. I2C Voltage
Controller. This controller is a small package that connects, at one end, to the Precision
tester through an I2C (telephone) cable. The opposite end has a male BNC connector. The
I2C Voltage Controller can be used as a software-controlled voltage source in the ±10.0-
Volt range. It can also be used to capture and digitize input voltages in the ±10.0-Volt
range.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 149

Figure 2 - I2C Voltage Controller

1. I2C Pulse (QL) ( ) - This Task outputs a user-specified voltage for a user-
specified period.
2. I2C Relay (QL) ( ) - This Task is used to set the I2C Voltage Controller output
relay: Enabled, Disabled or Toggle. There is some control of the relay state in the
other I2C Controller Tasks. In the other Tasks, the relay may be closed before Task
execution if it had been opened.
3. I2C Volts (QL) ( ) - The Task outputs a user-specified voltage and exits. The
voltage the DC signal is constant after the Task exits.
4. Read DAC Controller Volts (QL) ( ) - Here the voltage at the I2C Voltage
Controller is sampled in one of four ways: for a programmed number of samples
with use-specified delay between samples, continuously with a user-specified delay
between samples until user abort, continuously with a user-specified delay between
samples over a programmed period of time and intermittently on user demand until
user abort.

VI.1.3: PNDS
The Precision Nano-Displacement System is a table-top Atomic Force Microscope, offered
by Radiant Technologies, Inc., to measure the Angstrom-to-nanmoeter level piezoelectric
response of thin film samples.

1. PNDS Signals (QL) ( ) - The PNDS system includes two signal switch boards
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 150

that are under the software control of this Task. The first switches the charge meas-
urement signal into the tester RETURN port between Capacitor A, Capacitor B (for
the RTI sample board), the PNDS Cantilever (for conductive cantilevers) and No
Connection. The second board enables or disables signals to the tester SENSOR 1
and SENSOR 2 ports and switches the signals to each port between Z Drive, Z Er-
ror, Z Strain or Left-Right.

VI.1.3: RTI D2850C MUX
The Radiant Technologies, Inc. D2850C Multiplexer is a 16-to-2 MUX with each of the
two output channels (High and Low) associated with one 8-relay bank of sample connec-
tions. The mux controller is designed to bolt to the outside of a thermal chamber door with
penetrations that allow the sample connections to be made inside the chamber. A thermo-
couple is also associated with the RTI D2850C and may be selected for sampling in the
Read Temperature Task.

1. RTI D2850C MUX Signals (QL) ( ) - This Tasks assigns the user's selection of
High Signal relays to the High Sense/High mux BNC and the Low Signal relays to
the Low Sense/Low mux BNC.

VI.2: Measurement Tasks
Measurement Tasks are Hardware Tasks that record the sample response to the applied tester
stimulus. These Tasks include:

1. Advanced C/V (QL) ( ) - The Advanced C/V Task measures sample capacitance at
each of a series of voltage steps over a specified voltage profile. The measurement is
made by stepping to the current voltage, waiting a user-specified "soak" period to allow
step-induced signal to settle and then applying a small "tickle" voltage to induce the de-
tected charge. Since the charge of the tickle voltage is small, the tickle measurement is
repeated a user-specified number of times and averaged to remove random noise. The
stepped voltage provide may be either linear (zero to max Volts and then zero to nega-
tive max Volts) or triangular (zero to max Volts to zero and zero to negative max Volts
to zero). Before each leg of the measurement (positive, then negative) an unmeasured
preset signal - pulse or monopolar triangle - may be applied to preset the polarization
state. The user may also establish a custom drive profile with arbitrary voltages at each
step.

2. Charge (QL) ( ) – This Task mimics the standard Charge program of the RT66A
and RT6000 families of testers. It provides an easily configured measurement that in-
cludes both a Hysteresis loop and a PUND measurement.

3. I/V ( ) - The Task is similar to Advanced C/V. It measures the current through the
sample at each of a series of voltage steps over a specified voltage profile. The stepped
voltage provide may be either linear (zero to max Volts and then zero to negative max
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 151

Volts) or triangular (zero to max Volts to zero and zero to negative max Volts to zero).
Before each leg of the measurement (positive, then negative) an unmeasured preset sig-
nal - pulse or monopolar triangle - may be applied to preset the polarization state. The
user may also establish a custom drive profile with arbitrary voltages at each step.

4. Leakage (QL) ( ) – A DC Bias is applied to the sample continuously over two peri-
ods. First a non-measurement “soak” period allows noise and switching introduced by
the application of the voltage to settle and the sample to reach steady state. Then the
measurement period begins and the sample response is repeatedly measured. The re-
sponse value is converted into Current (mA), Resistance (Ω) and Resistivity (Ω·cm).

5. Read Sensor (QL) ( ) - The Task produces one or two single scaled, offset and la-
beled value(s) derived from voltages captured a the SENSOR 1 and/or SENSOR 2
ports. The values at the ports are sample a user-specified number of times and averaged
to produce the single value(s).

6. Read Sensor - Multi-Read (QL) ( ) - This Task captures Sensor voltages from
SENSOR 1 and/or SENSOR 2 ports. It scales, offsets and labels the data. Unless oper-
ating in "silent" mode, the captured data are charged in list boxes during execution. The
ports are sampled repeatedly in one of three ways: Automatically, with a user-specified
delay between samples, for a programmed sample count, automatically, with a user-
specified delay between samples, until the user stops the execution, manually, on user
demand, until the user stops execution.

7. Sensor Oscilloscope (QL) ( ) - This Task captures, scales, offset and labels SEN-
SOR 1 and/or SENSOR 2 continuously for a user-programmed period of up to 30,000
ms (30 seconds), depending on tester model. This is equivalent to making a Hysteresis
measurement without capturing polarization (µC/cm2) data.

8. Single-Point C/V (QL) ( ) - This Task is equivalent to the Advanced C/V Task ex-
cept that it measures sample capacitance at a single voltage. No data are displayed on
execution unless the Task is associated with a Single-Point Filter and operating in a
Branch Loop.

VI.2.1: Chamber Tasks
This suite of two custom Tasks measures sample Displacement as a function of tempera-
ture. These Tasks perform GPIB, RS232, RS485 or USB control of a thermal instrument -
chamber, furnace or hot chuck. These are custom Tasks that must be purchased and li-
censed to operate. The Tasks are distributed to everyone who installs Vision. Anyone can
open the Task configuration dialog for review and to access the Task instructions. Anyone
can review Chamber Task Suite data taken by a licensed copy of these Tasks. However, in
order to operate the Tasks a license file, named security.sec, must be placed in C:\Program

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 152

Files (x86)\Radiant Technologies\Vision\System. Security.sec is coded to the Chamber
Task suite and to any other custom Tasks that may have been purchase. It is also coded to a
unique ID embedded into the tester for which it was purchased. The tester must be con-
nected to the Vision host computer and powered for the Tasks to operate. The license may
be copied to as many computers as required, but cannot be transferred to other Precision
testers.

NOTE that, for GPIB thermal controllers, National Instruments continues to provide
installed GPIB interface boards that will provide outstanding service to these Tasks.
However, given the portability of the Vision program, Radiant Technologies, Inc. rec-
ommends the National Instruments GPIB-USB-HS interface. This is a GPIB connect-
or on a cable with a USB connector at the other end. It can be easily moved between
computer hosts. (Each host must have the NI-488.2 software installed.)

NOTE that, for GPIB thermal controllers, the GPIB interface hardware used must be
100% compatible with the National Instruments NI-488.2 drivers. In particular, Ra-
diant Technologies is aware of GPIB interfaces produced by Keithley. These interfac-
es are not compatible with Vision.

1. Chamber ( ) - This program characterizes the Dielectric Constant of a sample
as a function of applied temperature using a PUND and/or Small-Signal AC (C/V)
measurement. From these measurements the Pyroelectric Constant can be derived
for the sample. The program controls an external thermal device through the GPIB
or other bus on the Vision host computer. It alternately sets a new experimental
temperature, then measures the sample properties. This procedure is repeated for a
programmable number of times at various temperatures. Temperatures for each
stress/measure sequence may be independently specified. Or an initial temperature
is programmed and subsequent temperatures are determined by incrementing the
previous temperature by a fixed step size.

2. Remanent Chamber ( ) - This program is identical to Chamber except that it
replaces the PUND measurement with a Remanent Hysteresis measurement to ar-
rive at the spontaneous polarization value. This alters the values captured by the
Task and measurement configuration. The reason for the change is that there is con-
cern that high voltage pulse measurements at high temperatures will be so conduc-
tive that sample will be damaged. Remanent Hysteresis measurements have more
gradual rise times than PUND measurements and are safer in this regard.

VI.2.2: Current Loop
1. Current Loop (QL) ( ) - This Task is identical to the Hysteresis Task except
that the integrating capacitor is not switched into the Precision Tester virtual ground
circuitry. Instead a resistor is switched in. The voltage output of the circuitry, then,
relates to current through the sample by V = ir => i = V/r. As a result, this Task
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 153

provides a direct measurement of sample current as a function of the DRIVE volt-
age profile.

VI.2.3: Hysteresis
This collection of Tasks is based around the basic Hysteresis measurement that forms the
fundamental tool for ferroelectric research.

1. Check Hysteresis ( ) - This is identical to the Hysteresis Task except: it runs on-
ly in a Test Definition in a DataSet and is not found in QuikLook, It shows a Data
Presentation dialog on execution, it offers the user an opportunity to accept the data,
reject the data and remeasure or abort the measurement. This allows modification
and checking of the physical experiment - such as resetting a probe tip - before a
measurement is recorded to the DataSet Archive.

2. Curve Energy (QL) ( ) - The Curve Energy Task integrates various sections of
standard bipolar and/or standard monopolar Hysteresis measurements to theoretical
ferroelectric material properties including:

- ±Instantaneous Dielectric Constant
- High-Field Imaginary Dielectric Constant
- High-Field Real Dielectric Constant
- Dielectric Loss

3. DLTS (QL) ( ) - The DLTS (Deep-Level Transient Spectroscopy) Task is a
highly-customized Hysteresis measurement for researchers who want to study sam-
ple response after being pulsed to a voltage. Here, after a zero-Volt delay period, a
signal pulse is applied of user-specified voltage and pulse width. To allow the RE-
TURN signal amplification level to be increased, the user may specify a slower
ramp to voltage. The DLTS is unique in that the user can tell the Task to open the
virtual ground integrator (start the measurement) at any time during the measure-
ment period. Normally the measurement will begin immediately after the pulse re-
turns to 0.0 Volts. The difference in measured polarization (µC/cm2) between any
two measured points may be captured for any number of point pairs.

4. General Monopolar (QL) ( ) - In the General Monopolar Task between one and
five triangular or sinusoidal monopolar hysteresis measurements can be made. Each
measurement is of independent voltage and period (ms). Each measurement may
independently have a DC Bias or pulse preset of measurement-specific voltage and
duration. In its default configuration, the Task mimics a continuous PUND meas-
urement.

5. Hysteresis (QL) ( ) - This is the fundament ferroelectric measurement. By de-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 154

fault a triangular bipolar voltage stimulus waveform, of user-defined voltage and
period (ms) is applied to the sample inducing a charge (µC) response that is cap-
tured by the tester and Vision and converted to polarization (µC/cm2). The Task of-
fers many, many variations on this basic measurement.

6. PAINT (QL) ( ) - PAINT (Piezo-Acoustic sensing of Ink channels in the Time
domain) is very similar to the DLTS Task. It is intended to capture acoustic-induced
polarization generated in a fluid and resulting in a pulse and echo response. In par-
ticular, the response within an inkjet printer ink well is to be analyzed. What is of
interest, here, is the reflections after the pulse. The integrator (measurement) can be
delayed until after the pulse, measuring only the acoustic response and echo.

7. Remanent Hysteresis (QL) ( ) - This is a piecemeal composite Hysteresis con-
structed by making Logic 1 and Logic 0 measurements, in both positive and nega-
tive voltage directions and subtracting the Logic 0 measurement from the Logic 1
measurement.

Logic 1 is a measurement that presets the polarization state so that the measurement
switches sample polarization state. It contains polarization components:

Remanent Polarization + Non-Remanent Polarization + Linear Capacitance + Resistive Leakage
+ Other.

Logic 0 is a measurement that presets the polarization state so that the measurement
does not sample polarization state. It contains polarization components:

Non-Remanent Polarization + Linear Capacitance + Resistive Leakage + Other.

Where:

- Non-remanent polarization is polarization that switches with the application of
voltage, but rerandomizes at zero Volts.
- Remanent polarization is polarization that switches with the application of volt-
age and remains switched at zero Volts. This is the desirable polarization com-
ponent in ferroelectric capacitors.

8. TDC Hysteresis (QL) ( ) - Some components of a polarization measurement
will vary with measurement period (ms). These are known as Time-Dependent
Components. They are equivalent to Frequency-Dependent Components, where
Frequency (Hz) = 1000/Period (ms). (By extension, Period (ms) = 1000/Frequency
(Hz).) These components are normally, though not always, undesirable. Resistive
Leakage is a primary Time-Dependent Component of a polarization measurement.
This Task takes two Hysteresis measurements at the same voltage, but differing pe-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 155

riods (ms) and derives the Time-Dependent Component from the measurements. It
then compensates one of the two measurements, as selected by the user, to eliminate
the Time-Dependent Component.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 156

VI.2.4: Long-Duration Tasks
This is a suite of Tasks whose execution is extended in time, usually over several
stress/measure sequences. The stress portion of the sequence is often extended over time
and is variable in time from sequence to sequence. These Tasks are notable in several ways
relating to the fact that execution is extended. First, they do not appear in the QuikLook
menu. This is because, by their nature, they would not be executed if data were not to be
stored. Second, the user may follow the Task progress because these plot their data as they
are executed, unlike most Measurement Task that require a Filter. Finally, these Tasks are
able to export their data on execution and do not require a Print/Export Filter to do so.

1. Fatigue ( ) – It performs a standard PUND measurement, then repeatedly cycles
through a waveform stress period and PUND measurement pair. The stress period can
be modified at each sequence, normally resulting in longer and longer periods between
measurements. Fatigue differs from other Tasks in that it does not require a Filter
(described below) in order to plot during execution. Since Fatigue is a long duration
Task, it provides its own updated plot without using a Filter. It also exports data with-
out the need for the Print/Export Filter.

2. Imprint ( ) - The Imprint Task measures the growth of the Imprint damage mecha-
nism by applying a sequence in which the sample is poled, raised to an elevated tem-
perature for a time, reduced in temperature and measured. The sequence can be repeat-
ed for a programmed number of times and the duration of the imprinting temperature
can be automatically adjusted at each iteration. The measurement establishes a Figure
of Merit that is based on the shift in coercive voltage as the Hysteresis loop shifts hori-
zontally away from center in a direction opposite the imprinted state as imprint grows.
This program normally requires automatic adjustment of a thermal controller as in the
Set Temperature Task. However, the Task may operate with the temperature adjusted
manually.

3. Long-Duration Current ( ) - This Task measures the current through the sample at
regular, user-defined intervals, as the sample is stressed by a series of DC Bias voltag-
es, each of independent voltage and duration (s).

4. Resist ( ) - The Task measures the current through the sample at a fixed voltage. It
then performs a stress/measurement sequence in which a DC Bias is applied to the
sample for a period of time and then removed so that the sample's current can again be
measured. The measurement sequence is repeated for a programmed number of times.
At each iteration the duration of the stress Bias is adjusted in a programmed way. This
Task measures the Time-Dependent Dielectric Breakdown (TDDB).

5. Retain ( ) - In this Task the sample is preset to a polarization state and then held in
that state for a period of time. At the end of the period the two pulse measurements are
applied to the sample to characterize the amount of Remanent polarization that remains
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 157

in the sample after the delay. The delay/measure sequence is repeated for a program-
mable number of times with the delay adjusted at each iteration in a programmable
way. A bias voltage can be applied to the sample during the delay period.

VI.2.5: Magneto-Electrics (CS 2.5) Tasks
This suite of custom Tasks must be purchased and licensed. The license normally accom-
panies the purchase of the Radiant Technologies Magneto-Electric bundle that includes the
Radiant Technologies, Inc. CS 2.5 Current Source. These Tasks are specifically intended to
operate with the CS 2.5. The CS 2.5 is an I2C-controlled instrument connected to a Preci-
sion tester. It is primarily a constant current source that outputs a current (Amps) that is lin-
early related to an input voltage by A = 0.25 V. The current output can also be controlled
programmatically with no input voltage. The output current is limited to a range of ±2.0 A.
The CS 2.5 also has two ±10.0-Volt outputs. These are controlled programmatically from
within Vision. For magneto-electric purposes, the output current is normally routed as input
to a Helmholtz Coil. The ±10.0-Volt output(s) can be used to operate fixed magnets.

1. CS 2.5 Current (QL) ( ) - The Task programmatically sets a specific DC output
current at the CS 2.5. The current is not related to an input voltage at the CS 2.5. Once
the current is set, the Task exits. The current must be halted by 0.0 A execution of the
Task or by other means.

2. DC Magnetic Field (CS 2.5) (QL) ( ) - The Task sets a specific DC magnetic field
(G) by applying a constant input voltage to the fixed magnet amplifier. To achieve the
specified field, the user must enter a Field-to-Volts Ratio (G/A) that comprise the G/A
ratio of the fixed X the A/V ratio of the magnet amplifier. The fixed voltage is applied
programmatically through the CS 2.5 Field Bias 1 or Field Bias 2 voltage source.

3. Magneto-Electric Response (CS 2.5) (QL) ( ) - This Task measures a sample's po-
larization response to the application of a periodic magnetic field. It is equivalent to a
Hysteresis measurement that replaces the voltage stimulus with the magnetic field
stimulus.

4. Single-Point C/V (MR) (CS 2.5) (QL) ( ) - This Task performs a standard Single-
Point C/V measurement in the presence of a fixed magnetic field. (No Help Project
Available as of this Writing.)

VI.2.5: Magneto-Electrics (Generic) Tasks
This suite of custom Tasks must be purchased and licensed. The license normally accom-
panies the purchase of the Radiant Technologies Magneto-Electric bundle that is to be as-
sociated with another manufacturer's current amplifier. The original magneto bundle in-
cluded the Kepco BOP 36 amplifier. But any amplifier associated with an electromagnet or
Helmholtz Coil may be used.. Experiments are often configured using two sets of magnetic

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 158

field generators: A Helmholtz Coil that can be driven with a periodic signal and a fixed
electromagnet providing a DC field. The control of the fixed magnet amplifier is provided
by an RTI I2C Voltage Controller.

1. DC Magnetic Field (Generic) (QL) ( ) - The Task sets a DC magnetic field on a
fixed electromagnet by providing a fixed voltage into the magnet amplifier through the
I2C Voltage Controller (Figure 2, above). The user must know the ratio of the fixed
magnet field output to the amplifier input voltage, given as Field-to-Volts Ratio (G/V).

2. ME Sensor Cal (Generic) (QL) ( ) - The actual magnetic field applied to the sam-
ple during a measurement can be inferred or measured in a number of ways. The volt-
age applied to the current amplifier is known. Scaling this voltage by the appropriate ra-
tios - Voltage x Amplifier Amps/Volt x Helmholtz Coil Field (G)/Amp - gives an accu-
rate estimate of the field, provided the ratios are accurate. Inserting an RTI Current
Sensor into the signal path eliminates one of the ratios by measuring the current into the
Helmholtz Coil directly. Then Field = Current Amps x Helmholtz Coil Field (G)/Amp.
Or the field can be measured directly using a Gaussmeter. In some cases the Gaussme-
ter detector cannot be physically present during the actual measurement. In this case its
contribution must be measured off-line. More recently, Radiant Technologies, Inc.
Magnetic Shield Boxes incorporate two Hall-Effect Sensors - one perpendicular to the
sample that measures field parallel to the sample and the other parallel to the sample,
measuring field perpendicular to the sample. This Task allows any or all of these
measurement techniques to be characterized and linearly related over a series of
stepped fields, with each step providing a DC field for an extended period so that val-
ues can be captured.

1. Magneto-Electric Response (Generic) (QL) ( ) - This Task measures a sample's
polarization response to the application of a periodic magnetic field. It is equivalent to a
Hysteresis measurement that replaces the voltage stimulus with the magnetic field
stimulus.

1. Single-Point C/V (MR) (Generic) (QL) ( ) - This Task performs a standard Sin-
gle-Point C/V measurement in the presence of a fixed magnetic field.

VI.2.6: Piezo Tasks
This suite of custom Tasks must be purchased and licensed. The Piezo Tasks are Tasks that
capture the SENSOR port voltage simultaneously with the measurement. The voltage at the
SENSOR port is assumed to be linearly related to the sample's displacement, captured by
some form of displacement sensor. That instrument must output a voltage in the ±10.0-Volt
range and the voltage is linear with respect to the measured voltage. Piezo Tasks perform
displacement analysis on the SENSOR port signal.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 159

1. Piezo (QL ( ) - Piezo adds the measurement of a piezo-electric sample displace-
ment to the Hysteresis Task. Normally the displacement signal is provided by an MTI-
2000 displacement meter, provided by Radiant Technologies, Inc., that linearly relates
sample displacement to a voltage that is detected by the Precision hardware and the Pi-
ezo Task. Any displacement meter that provides a voltage that relates linearly to dis-
placement may be used. Thin film samples may be measured by attaching an AFM.

2. Advanced Piezo ( ) - Although the Advanced Piezo Task serves the piezoelectric
measurement needs of any experimental situation, the Task is primarily intended for
users whose displacement measurements are small relative to displacement signal noise
and/or users who have a constant linear drift in their displacement signal. In particular,
the Task serves well for, and is targeted at, thin film measurements made on an Atomic
Force Microscope (AFM). The Task performs repeated measurements, over a user-
programmed number of iterations (1-10) and averages these to produce a noise-reduced
measurement. The averaged (processed) data and all of the raw measurements are
stored and available for data recall and display. The user may optionally zero the pro-
cessed data by subtracting the initial displacement value from all sample points in the
data. An optional weighted smoothing average may be passed over the processed data
to further reduce noise. Finally, linear drift throughout the measurement may be re-
moved either manually, by providing a constant known drift term, or automatically, by
incrementally removing the difference between the first and last displacement value.

VI.2.7: Pulse Tasks
Pulse Tasks are Measurement Tasks that take data from the sample by performing one or
more voltage pulses on the sample. Data are measured both at the peak voltage and after
the voltage has returned from the pulse.

1. Simple Pulse (QL) ( ) – A single pulse is applied to the sample. The pulse may be
read/write or write-only. A write-only pulse would be used to preset the sample to a
known state. No measurement is returned from a write-only pulse. Pre-pulse voltage
may be set to a non-zero value for a controllable period of time. After the pulse a non-
zero end voltage may be specified to which the drive voltage is set. This end voltage
will be maintained until the post-pulse measurement is made, then voltage will return to
zero.

2. General Pulse ( ) – A series of between 1 and 5 completely independent pulses.
Start voltage, pulse voltage, pulse width end voltage and read or write-only characteris-
tics of the pulses can be independently varied. Any pulses may be completely disabled
to create a pulse train that has fewer than the maximum 5 pulses.

3. PUND ( ) – A standard ferroelectric pulse test consisting of a sequence of five

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 160

pulses. The first pulse is write-only and presets the sample to a known state. The four
following pulses are read pulses that alternatively switch, then maintain the sample po-
larization state during the pulses. Eight values are taken. P* values represent measure-
ments of the switching pulses. P^ values are taken from the non-switching pulses. The
first two-pulse sequence measures positive response and the second sequence the nega-
tive response. An “r” subscript indicates that the measurement was taken after the pulse
voltage returned to zero volts. Its absence indicates that the measurement was taken at
the maximum voltage application. The resulting parameters are ±P*, ± P*r, ± P^ and ±
P^r.

VI.2.8: Transistor Task
This suite of custom Tasks must be purchased and licensed. These three Tasks characterize
the current through a sample by providing a Gate-Source Voltage (VGS) through the tester
DRIVE port and a Drain-Source Voltage (VDS) using an I2C Voltage Controller (Figure 2,
above).

1. Transistor Current (QL) ( ) - This Task is analogous to the standard Leakage
Task. Here, the current through the transistor sample is measured at fixed VGS and VDS
for a user-specified period. A user-controlled Soak Time (ms) is applied after the step to
the voltages to allow step-induced charge movement to settle and ensure that the sam-
ple is at steady state.

2. Transistor I/V ( ) - This Task extends Transistor Current in the same way that the
I/V Task extends Leakage. The Task makes repeated Transistor Current measurements,
over a profile that varies VGS to ±DRIVE Volts (Vgs) using a linear or triangular pro-
file. The sample may be preset by applying a voltage opposite the maximum voltage for
the measurement leg (switched) or in the same direction of the voltage of the measure-
ment leg (unswitched).

3. Transistor Curve Trace ( ) - Here, the Transistor Current measurement is extended
into a third dimension by repeating the Transistor VDS curves while stepping VGS in
fixed increments over a user-defined number of measurements.

VI.3: Parasitics Tasks
The purpose of these two Tasks is to measure and store the influence of tester electronics on cap-
tured data (parasitics). The measured noise is then removed from standard data measurements to
render them morel accurate. This process consists of a single Measurement Task and a single Fil-
ter Task. The two Tasks have been grouped together into their own category.

1. Parasitics (QL) ( ) - The Parasitics Task works in tandem with the Compensation
Filter Task. This Task performs a measurement, selected by the user, on an unloaded
tester. The purpose is to characterize the parasitic contribution of the tester's internal elec-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 161

tronics to the measurement in question. The results can then be saved to a file as a per-
manent record of system parasitics for the particular measurement under the particular
configuration specified by the user. The Parasitics (Compensation) Filter Task can then
take input from a loaded measurement and subtract the parasitic contribution by recalling
it from the file. This device is particularly useful in the measurement of very small sam-
ples whose response may have a significant contribution from internal system parasitic
values. Along with the Parasitics Filter Task, Parasitics is placed in its own folder, named
"Parasitics", in the Library.

2. Compensation Filter ( ) - This Task has been added in conjunction and works to-
gether with the Parasitics measurement Task. Together with the Parasitics Task, it is
listed separately in its own Folder named "Parasitics". This Task takes as its input a
Measurement Task of type Hysteresis, Piezo, PUND, Simple Pulse or General Pulse. It
also takes as input a file that was generated by the Parasitics Task when making a meas-
urement of the chosen type with no sample attached (unloaded). That file represents re-
sponse generated by the tester electronics that is very low. The file is checked for agree-
ment with the input Task in measurement type and general configuration, then the file da-
ta are subtracted from the measured data to remove system parasitics. This is very useful
for measurements on extremely small samples that have low signal of which a significant
portion may be system parasitics.

VI.4: Program Control Tasks
Program Control Tasks are Tasks that can be combined with Hardware and Filter Tasks in the
design of a program or Test Definition. These Tasks are used to regulate experimental flow and
sequencing. Some are used to document the Test Definition.

1. Close All Plots ( ) - When this Task executes all plots generated by Filter Tasks
and/or Long-Duration Measurement Tasks will be removed from the User Area. This
Task must be used carefully. If it is included in a Branch Loop with a Filter Task that is
operating in Append Mode, the Filter Task will crash after the first Branch Loop iteration
since there is no plot to append data to.

2. Delay ( ) - This Task pauses Test Definition execution for a user-specified period of
time (s). During that period, a progress dialog is displayed. The progress dialog can be
configured to display a message, known as a prompt. The prompt may have a single User
Variable appended to it to monitor some property of the Test Definition. The delay period
may be manually abbreviated by clicking Cancel. Loop Abort also abbreviates the delay
and will force any subsequent Branch Task to stop Branch Looping regardless of the state
of the Branch Logic Condition.

3. Delay To Time ( ) - This Task pauses Test Definition execution until the Vision host
computer clock reaches a programmed date and time. The Task displays a count-down
dialog while waiting for the programmed time. At that programmed time the dialog clos-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 162

es and the Task passes execution to the next Task in the Test Definition. The count-down
dialog can be used to abbreviate the delay, with an option to abort any Branch Looping.
A drawback of this Task is that it cannot be repeatedly executed in a Test Definition
without reprogramming before each execution. For the same reason, the Task will only
be effective during the first iteration of a Branch Loop.

4. File Start/Abort ( ) - This Task pauses Test Definition execution until Vision detects
C:\DataSets\StartTest\Start.txt or C:\DataSets\StartTest\Abort.txt. The Task also presents
a dialog on execution at which the Test Definition may be manually started or aborted.
On detecting a file or a dialog button click the Task will close the dialog and either pass
execution to the next Task in the Test Definition or abort Test Definition execution.

5. Pause ( ) - On execution this Task displays a dialog and waits for a user to close it.
The dialog can display a prompt string and the prompt string can have a single User Vari-
able appended to it to display the state of some property of the Test Definition. The user
may cause any Branch Task that follows the Pause Task to stop Branch Looping regard-
less of the state of the Branch Logic Condition. This Tasks is particularly useful in Test
Definitions that require physical reconfiguration, such as moving a probe tip from one
sample to another.

VI.4.1: Branch Tasks
Branch Task and Branch Looping – The Branch Task is a very special Task. Using this
Task a loop can be created within an experiment allowing any series of Tasks to be repeated-
ly executed in sequence. Thus a simple series of a few Tasks can be used to create a large and
complex experiment. A loop is created by inserting the Branch Task immediately after the
series of Tasks that is to be repeated. In the Branch configuration, a preceding Task is select-
ed as the Branch Target. When execution reaches the Branch Task it may return to the
Branch Target. The decision to return execution to the Branch Target or continue execution
with the following Task is made by the Branch Task based on a logical comparison (Branch
Logic Condition), programmed by the user, between a Global User Variable and a user-
defined constant value. Note that Branch Tasks will not Branch to Branch Target Tasks that
follow the Branch in the experimental Task sequence. (No forward Branching.) Branch
Loops may not include other Branch Loops within them (no nested Branching). This is en-
forced by the software by showing only a list of eligible Tasks as Branch Target Tasks. De-
lay, DC Bias and Waveform Tasks may alter the length of their duration in a Branch Loop by
repeatedly applying an increment or a scale factor to the previous duration. Most Measure-
ment Tasks are able to adjust Task configuration parameters such as voltage or delays. These
include voltage, frequency and pulse width adjustments as appropriate. Controls on the pro-
gress dialog of the Delay, DC Bias and Waveform Tasks, as well as the Pause, Manual Exit
and Manual Branch Abort Tasks also allow the user to terminate the Branch Looping before
the Branch Loop Condition fails.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 163

Figure 3 - Legal and Illegal Branching.

1. Branch Task ( ) - This is the primary Task in a Branch structure. It compares the

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 164

current state of a User Variable to a fixed condition using a selected comparison. If
the comparison is true ("Hysteresis: Current Volts < 20.0", for example) the Branch
passes execution control back to the Branch Target Task. (Presumably, in this exam-
ple, there is a Hysteresis Task that is adjusting its voltage in the Branch Loop.) If the
comparison is not true ("Hysteresis: Current Volts >= 20.0") the Branch passes exe-
cution to the Task that follows it in the Test Definition. If no Task follows it, the Test
Definition terminates.

2. Auto Branch Abort ( ) - This is a convenient Task that is designed to be pro-
grammed into a Branch Loop. It performs a logic comparison between a User Varia-
ble and a fixed constant programmed value. Based on that comparison it either forces
the subsequent Branch Task to abort branching or allows it to continue. This is identi-
cal to the way the Branch Task itself operates and is an option that allows the Branch
to operate by depending on multiple User Variables or a User Variable with multiple
limits. In other words, Branching can depend on more than one Branch Logic Condi-
tion.

3. Manual Branch Abort ( ) - The Task is programmed into a Branch Loop and is
used to force the subsequent Branch Task to stop Branching regardless of the state of
its Branch Logic Condition.

4. Timed Branch Abort ( ) - This is a combination of the Manual Branch Abort and
Delay Tasks. Like the Manual Branch Abort Task, execution of the Timed Branch
Abort Task presents a dialog that allows the user to abort a Branch Loop into which
the Task is programmed or to allow the Branch to continue. However, the Manual
Branch Abort has the disadvantage of freezing the execution of the Test Definition
until the user responds. The Timed Branch Abort includes a programmable expiration
time, presented to the user as a progress dialog during execution. If the user does not
respond within the delay period, the Task will exit and not adjust the Branch Loop
option. This allows the Manual Branch Abort option to be included in a Test Defini-
tion that can, nevertheless, run unsupervised.

5. Nesting Branch Task ( ) - This Task is identical to the Branch Task except that it
allows one or more inner Branch Loops, defined by Branch Tasks and tjeir Branch
Targets to be programmed within an outer Branch Loop, defined by the Nesting
Branch Task and its Branch Target. The Nesting Branch Task adds its own "Loop
Counter - Nesting" User Variable. It also resets the standard "Loop Counter" User
Variable to '1' to allow the nested Branch Loop to be controlled based on that User
Variable. See Tutorial VIII for examples of the use of this Task.

VI.4.2: Documentation Tasks
1. General Information ( ) - This Task is normally the first, or nearly the first, Task

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 165

in a Test Definition. It is not normally programmed into a Branch Loop. The Task is
used to set experimental information such as the Sample Name, Area, Thickness, etc.
a single time. Once the Task is configured, these values are persistent and automati-
cally preset in each new Task added to the Test Definition. The main feature of this
Task is a Comments box that is not limited to 511 characters. This allows for a
lengthy and detailed description of the Test Definition. No known limit is placed on
the number of characters, though there may be some practical limit such as 32,768.

2. Hyperlink ( ) - On execution, the Task allows the user to insert any number of
links to documents on the Vision host computer hard drive and/or to web browser
html documents. The links can then be exercised at a later time when the Task is re-
called from the DataSet Archive. The drawback of this Task is that the user must pre-
dict that documentation will need to be established at runtime.

3. Runtime Label ( ) - This Task presents a dialog on execution. The dialog allows
both the Task Name to be changed and a Comments box to be written when the Task
is run. The utility is that the user can make notes regarding the Test Definition as it is
executing. The user must predict where and when such comments will be appropriate
and must be present to acknowledge the Task as it executes.

4. Timed Runtime Label ( ) - This Task duplicates the Runtime Label Task. How-
ever, on execution it presents a progress dialog with a user-programmed expiration
time. The dialog allows both the Task name to be changed and a comment box to be
written when the Task is run. The utility is that the user can make notes regarding the
Test Definition as it is executing. The user must predict where and when such com-
ments will be appropriate and must be present to acknowledge the Task as it executes.
The expiration time allows the Task to be programmed into a Test Definition that can
be run unsupervised. The user may still interact with the Task and provide documen-
tation, but if no interaction occurs, the Test Definition will continue to execute.

VI.4.3: Exit Tasks
Exit Tasks are Tasks that terminate the execution of a Test Definition prematurely.

1. Automatic (Conditional) Exit ( ) – This Task also allows the experiment execu-
tion to terminate prematurely. However, the decision to terminate or continue is made
by the Task itself, based on criteria programmed during its configuration. A compari-
son is made between a Global User Variable and a user-defined constant value. (See
the discussion of Global User Variables). Depending on the results of that compari-
son, the experiment will either continue or will terminate.

2. Manual Exit ( ) – This is a Task that allows the experiment execution to terminate
prematurely. It will normally be inserted between Tasks in an experiment sequence.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 166

The Task is identical to the Pause Task in its presentation. However, the user has a
choice to either continue execution with the following Task (press Continue ) or to
terminate execution (press Exit ). The Task also has a Prompt and appended Global
User Variable available. This Task requires human intervention. If the Task allows
the Test Definition to continue, a check box can be selected that will force a Branch
Loop to terminate, assuming the Task is programmed into a Branch Loop, regardless
of the state of the Branch Logic Condition. See the discussion of the Branch Task .

3. Timed Exit ( ) - This Task is identical to the Manual Exit Task except that it
will wait for user input only for a programmed period of time. If no input is received
within that time, the Task will terminate and the Test Definition will continue normal-
ly. This allows an unsupervised Manual Exit Task to be inserted that will not prevent
Test Definition execution if no human intervention occurs.

VI.4.4: If/Then/Endif Tasks
The If/Then and Endif Tasks work in a pair that allows the user to skip execution of the
Tasks that form sections of a Test Definition.

1. If/Then Task ( ) - As with the Branch, Nesting Branch, Auto Branch Abort and Auto
Exit Tasks, the If/Then Task is configured by construction a logic condition out of the
comparison of the current state of a User Variable with a fixed parameter. If the logic
condition is false, the If/Then Task passes execution to the next Task in the Test Defini-
tion. However, if the logic condition is true, the If/Then Task will search the subsequent
Tasks in the Test Definition, sequentially, until it locates the Endif Task and will pass ex-
ecution to it, bypassing the intermediate Tasks. If there is no Endif Task, the execution
will terminate, making the If/Then Task equivalent to an Auto Exit Task.

2. Endif Task ( ) - The Endif Task performs no function. It simply serves as a place
marker at the end of a sequence of Tasks in the Test Definition that may be skipped,
based on a Logic Condition, by a preceding If/Then Task. If the Task sequence is
skipped, execution will resume at the Endif Task.

VI.4.5: Timing Tasks
The Set Start Time and Elapsed Time Tasks work as a pair to mark the elapsed real clock
time in a Test Definition.

1. Set Start Time ( ) - The Set Start Time Task captures and records the Vision host
computer clock date and time at the time of Task execution. The Task records the var-
ious Dat/eTime parameters (Month, Day, Hour, Minute, etc.) as well as the full
date/time as both text and integer value User Variables. ("Set Start Time: Day
(Text)", "Set Start Time: Day (Value)", etc.) This establishes the reference time for
the Elapsed Time Task.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 167

2. Elapsed Time ( ) - On execution he Set Start Time Task captures and records the
Vision host computer clock date and time and computes the difference from the time
recorded by the Set Start Time Task. The Task records both the currently detected
and elapsed Dat/Time parameters (Month, Day, Hour, Minute, etc.) as well as the full
date/time as both text and integer value User Variables. ("Elapsed Time: Current Day
(Text)", "Elapsed Time: Current Day (Value)", ("Elapsed Time: Elapsed Days
(Text)", "Elapsed Time: Elapsed Days (Value)", etc.).

VI.4.6: User Variable Tasks
User Variables are elements on a list maintained by Vision that are accessible to the user to
monitor the current state of the Vision program. Each User Variable has a unique name by
which it is identified in all applications. It also has a type (Real, Integer, Test or Boolean) and
a value of that type. As seen in early Task discussion, User Variables can be used to report
the status of the program. The also play a very key role in programmatic control, forming the
Logic Conditions of the Branch, Nesting Branch, Auto Branch Abort, Auto Exit and If/Then
Tasks. Normally User Variables are added by the individual Tasks as they are accessed in
Vision. However, the user may employ these Tasks to create and manipulate custom User
Variables as well.

1. Make User Variable ( ) - The Task allows the user to create a custom User Vari-
able of user-programmed name, type and initial value. The User Variable may be re-
ferred to, as with any other User Variable, to provide information or program control.
The Task is most useful when combined with the Update User Variable Task to modi-
fy the custom variable during program execution.

2. Update User Variable ( ) - The Task allows the user to change the value stored in
a User Variable based on the variable type and programmed update methods. It is in-
cluded to allow the addition of custom variables using Make User Variable a useful
tool in programming experiment sequencing and reviewing and analyzing data. How-
ever, there is no distinction between User Variables created by Tasks and those creat-
ed by users, so this Task can alter any existing User Variable.

3. User Variable Snapshot ( ) - The Task collects and stores the state of all listed
User Variables at the time the Task executes.

4. Selected User Variable Snapshot ( ) - The Task collects and stores the state of all
listed User Variables at the time the Task executes.

VI.5: Filter Tasks
A very important category of Tasks is the Filter. In general, a Filter Task serves four functions.

1. Gather data from one or more preceding Measurement Tasks of like type or from a pre-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 168

ceding Filter.

2. Manipulate the gathered data in accordance with the Filter function.

3. Store manipulated data.

4. Optionally display the data in a plot window.

The Filter is particularly important for three reasons. First, it is the only way to alter the original
measured data. Altered data are then stored by the Filter for immediate recall, while the original
data are stored unadulterated by the Task(s) that measured them. Secondly, data are not dis-
played to the user, during execution, by the Tasks that measured them. (The Fatigue and Retain
Tasks, among others, are exceptions to this rule.) Instead, the data are simply stored. These data
may then be regathered, during the execution of a Filter Task and displayed to the user. Third,
data may be gathered from multiple Tasks (of identical type) so that a single plot window may
display several measurements. Most Filters can collect input data vectors from either Measure-
ment Tasks or from other Filters so that data may be repeatedly filtered.

Since Filters can take their data from preceding Filters as well as from Measurement Tasks, the
data can be manipulated in stages. Plotting can be enabled or disabled for any of the Filters, so
that the progression of data manipulation can be observed as it occurs.

1. Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - This Filter does not perform any data manipulation, but simp-
ly gathers data from any measurement and optionally displays them. (Data simply pass
through the Filter, thus the original name of Pass-Through Filter.) Data gathering and
plotting options are sophisticated and varied. If plotting data and operating in a Branch
Loop the Filter can be configured to Append collected data to a single plot or generate a
new plot at each Task execution This is a common option to most Filter Tasks.

2. Generic Axis Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - This Task is identical to the Collect/Plot Filter
except that the independent X-Axis value is taken from the Y-Axis parameter of a single
input Tasks of the same or different type as the collected input data. Since only a single
Y-Axis vector can be input as the X-axis of this Filter, the Filter X-Axis input types are
limited to Filters that output only a single data vector. These include Single-Input Single-
Point Filter, Single-Input Collect/Plot Filter, Single-Trace Loop Average Filter, Two-
Trace Math Filter and the RT6000 and RT66A Data Import Filters.

3. Long-Duration Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - This Filter gathers X- and Y-Axis data from
one or more Long-Duration Tasks of a single type. Tasks include Advanced C/V, I/V,
Transistor I/V, Chamber, Remanent Chamber, Fatigue, Imprint, Resist and Retain.

4. Sensor Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - All measurement Tasks may collect , scale and offset
SENSOR port voltage data simultaneously with their measurement. In order for the
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 169

SEDNSOR Port data to be distinguished from the measured data (normally polarization
(µC/cm2) data) when collected by Filters, a distinct Sensor Collect/Plot Filter is provided.
This Filter, then collects the scaled and offset SENSOR port data as a function of the in-
put Task(s) X-Axis parameter (normally Volts). The Task was created before the SEN-
SOR 2 port was exposed for data collection. As a result, only SENSOR 1 data are col-
lected by this Task.

5. Sensor 2 Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - This Task is identical to the Sensor Collect/Plot Fil-
ter, except that it gathers only SENSOR 2 port data.

6. Single-Input Sensor Collect/Plot Filter ( ) - This Task is identical to the Sensor Col-
lect/Plot Filter, except that it gathers data only from a single input Task. It can capture
SENSOR 1 or SENSOR 2 data, but not both. The intention is to allow the Task to output
only a single X/Y data vector. This allows the Task to be used as input to other Filters,
such as the Generic Axis Collect/Plot Filter and the Two-Trace Math Filter, that limit the
number of input Tasks to a specific count.

7. Single-Point Filter ( ) - This Filter is specifically intended to operate in a Branch
Loop. It takes single-point parameters from its input Tasks and plots them as a function
of a parameter that is changing in a Branch Loop. Single-point parameters are specific
values measured by input Tasks or derived from the measured data. For example PMax
(µC/cm2), ±PR (µC/cm2) and ±Vc for Hysteresis or ±P* (µC/cm2) and ±P^ (µC/cm2) for
PUND.

8. Single-Input Single-Point Filter ( ) - This Task is identical to the Single-Point Filter
except that it limits the number of input Tasks to one and allows only one single-point pa-
rameter to be captured and plotted. The intention is to allow the Task to output only a
single X/Y data vector. This allows the Task to be used as input to other Filters, such as
the Generic Axis Collect/Plot Filter and the Two-Trace Math Filter, that limit the number
of input Tasks to a specific count.

9. Threshold Filter ( ) - The Threshold Filter Task is a very specific Task that reports
the sample time at which one or both of the SENSOR ports passes a user-defined thresh-
old voltage in a user-defined direction. The Threshold Filter takes its input from one or
more Sensor Collect/Plot and/or Sensor 2 Collect/Plot Filter Tasks. Those Filters must be
associated with Hysteresis-based Tasks that are configured to capture SENSOR 1 and/or
SENSOR 2 data. The Sensor (2) Collect/Plot Filter must be configured to collect the
SENSOR voltage data as a function of Hysteresis Sample time. The Filter may report any
number of threshold crossings for a given input data vector.

10. Single-Point Threshold Filter ( ) - This Task operates in a Branch Loop that contains
a Delay Task. In general, the Delay Task is configured to adjust the delay time in the

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 170

Branch Loop. The Tasks takes, as input, measured data and time vectors from one or
more Hysteresis Tasks that are configured to capture SENSOR 1 and/or SENSOR 2 port
data. The Filter collects, plots and stores the first time vector point at which the measured
data cross a user-defined threshold, in either the positive or negative direction, as a func-
tion of the current delay period.

VI.5.1: Averaging Filters
There are three Filter Tasks that present data that represent an average of data vectors.

1. Multi-Trace Averaging (MTA) Filter ( ) - This Task takes two or more input
vectors from two or more Measurement Tasks or Filters. It produces a single vector
that is the average of all input vectors.

2. Multi-Trace Loop Averaging (MTLA) Filter ( ) - The Filter is intended to oper-
ate in a Branch Loop. It takes as input any number of vectors and output twice the
number of vectors. One set of vectors is the summation of the input data over the cur-
rent number of Branch Loop iterations. The second series is the summation divided
by the number of Branch Loop iterations, producing the input vector averaged with it-
self over the Branch Looping. This reduces random noise in the input data.

3. Single-Trace Loop Averaging (STLA) Filter ( ) - This Filter is identical to the
Multi-Trace Loop Average Filter except that it limits its input to a single vector. This,
in turn, limits the Filter input Task types to those that generate only a single output
vector. The intention is to allow the Task to output only the accumulate and averaged
X/Y data vectors. This allows the Task to be used as input to other Filters, such as the
Generic Axis Collect/Plot Filter and the Two-Trace Math Filter, that limit the number
of input Tasks to a specific count. These take only the averaged data from the STLA
Filter.

VI.5.2: Math Filters
A variety of Filters perform mathematical operations on the input data.

1. Curve Fit Filter ( ) - The Filter fits the input data to a polynomial from a first de-
gree (linear) fit up to a fourth degree fit. Exponential fits are also planned.

2. Normalizing Filter ( ) - The Filter allows the input data to be normalized by a
constant value that is user-defined or derived from a trace maximum or minimum
positive or negative values. The maximum or minimum positive or negative value
may vary as it is derived from the trace being operated on. Or it may be a constant
value derived from one of the input traces, as selected by the user, and applied to all
traces.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 171

3. Single-Trace Math Filter ( ) - This Task takes input from one or more Measure-
ment Tasks or other Filters and produces one or more output vectors that are related
to the input data through one of four operations: The name Single-Trace refers to the
fact that the transform is applied independently to each input vector. Input vectors are
not mathematically combined. Multiple inputs and outputs are allowed.

• Scale, then offset - Y = m X + b
• Offset, then scale - Y = m ( X + b )
• Differentiation - This operation will produce an output vector that may have fewer
points than the input vector. This is a noise reduction technique that is discussed
in detail in the Task help pages.
• Integration

4. Two-Trace Math Filter - This Task takes input of exactly two data vectors from two
Tasks. It produces a single output vector that is the combination of the input vectors.
The input data are combined in one of four ways.

• Addition
• Subtraction
• Multiplication
• Division

The independent (X-axis) vector that is output can be programmed to be the inde-
pendent vector from data input Task A, from Task B, an average of the two or the
math may be applied to the independent data vectors as well. Because the Filter must
Take exactly two input data vectors, it can only take data from input Filters if they are
Filters that produce only a single output data vector, such as Multi-Trace Averaging.

5. Time-Dependent Compensation (TDC) Filter ( ) - This Task derives frequency-
dependent changes in polarization response from two Hysteresis input measurements
and corrects one of the measurement for the frequency dependent component. The
two Hysteresis input measurements are of the same voltage and point count and differ
in frequency by a small factor of, at most, 2X or 3X. Note that "Time-Dependent" and
"Frequency-Dependent" are equivalent. Frequency (Hz) = 1000/Period (ms) => Peri-
od (ms) = 1000/Frequency (Hz).

6. Trace Statistics Filter ( ) - In this Filter, one or more input traces is operated on
to produce four real-valued numbers per trace that represent the Maximum, Mini-
mum, Mean and Standard Deviationof the input trace over the number of points in the
trace.

VI.5.3: Noise Reduction Filters
These two Filters work to reduce noise in measured Tasks and in Filtered Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 172

1. Smoothing Filter ( ) - The Task replaces the input dependent value at every point,
i , with a weighed average of the values at point i and the n adjacent points before and
after point i. (Points i , i ± 1, i ± 2, ..., i ± n .) This produces values that do not change
the overall nature of the data vectors, but reduces high-frequency local noise.

2. Subsample Filter ( ) - This Filter extracts approximately every n th point from the
input data to produce a reduced data vector. n is specified by the user. The Task mod-
ifies n so that the first point and last point are always extracted while keeping the step
size as close to n as possible. The reduced data can help reduce noise when the data
are used in mathematical operations such as the denominator in a division or in a dif-
ferentiation.

VI.5.4 - Sorting Filter

1. Sorting Filter ( ) - Apply a name and evaluation to a sample measurement.
(No Task Instructions are available for this Task at the time of writing.)

VI.5.5: Special Purpose Filters - These Filters do not take measured data from other Tasks.
They perform special operations that defy categorization as anything but a Filter Task.

1. Print/Export Filter ( ) - This is an unusual Filter in that it performs none of
the four standard Filter functions. Instead, it calls upon assigned Tasks that precede it
in the Test Definition to export themselves during execution. Data may be exported to
a text file, to an Excel file, to a Word file or to the default printer. File export requires
the specification of a file path and file name during configuration. In the case of a text
file, data will be appended to a file if it already exists. In the case of Excel or Word
files, an existing file will be overwritten. For this reason, indices are appended to file
names to indicate a) which of the possibly multiple assigned Tasks is being recorded
and b) the loop iteration in the eventuality that the Tasks are programmed into a
Branch Loop. Re-execution of the same Test Definition will result in overwriting
previous executions files. Before re-executing, either the existing files should be re-
named or moved to a different file path or the Filter should be reconfigured. Any
Task can be associated with the Print/Export Filter.

2. RT66A-to-Vision and RT6000-to-Vision ( ) - These two Filters are presented to
allow the users of the older generation Radiant Technology testers - the RT66A and
the RT6000 series - to import their data into Vision where it can be stored, reviewed
and compared directly with other Vision-acquired data. The Filters read data that
have been stored in the original RT66A/RT6000 programs to the standard program
text data file. Files of the type generated by Charge, Fatigue, Resist and Retain can be
imported. The Filter automatically recognizes the file type and applies the correct im-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 173

port filter. These Filters may be associated as data input with other Filters, so that the
data can be linked with Vision-measured data for direct comparison. This option is
only available if the Filter is importing from a Charge file. These Filters are especial-
ly unusual as Filters in that they are present in the QuikLook menu.

VI.5.6: Task-Specific Filters
These are Filters that perform specific operations on ferroelectric data taken from specific
Tasks. These operations are those that are common in ferroelectric literature.

1. Current Loop Filter ( ) - This Task takes Hysteresis input data and backs out
the charge (µC) from the polarization (µC/cm2). It then calculated dQ/dt for each
measurement point. This gives the current (A) through the sample at each point.

2. Hysteresis Filter ( ) - This Filter takes data only from the Hysteresis Task,
Check Hysteresis Task or Remanent Hysteresis Task. It cannot accept data from other
Filters. It applies one of the following operations to the data...

• Centering
• Capacitance Vs. Voltage
• Normalized Capacitance Vs. Voltage
• Normalized Capacitance Vs. Polarization
• dP/dT Vs. Voltage
• Several Integrated Polarization Scalings.

3. Magneto-Electric Filter ( ) - The Filter collects polarization (µC/cm2) data from
one or more Magneto-Electric Response (CS 2.5) and/or Magneto-Electric Response
(Generic) input Tasks. It applies one of a variety of mathematical manipulations on
the data before plotting and storing. (No Task Instructions are available for this Task
at the time of writing.)

4. Piezo Filter ( ) - The Piezo Filter Task is identical to the Hysteresis Filter Task
except that it takes as it input data from a Piezo Task. In addition to polariation data
input and manipulation, the Piezo Filter Task accepts displacement data, captured at
the tester SENSOR port and applies these filters:

• No Filter
• dL/dV
• dL/dP
• L/V
• L/P

The Filter also allows both the polarization and displacement data to be (independent-
ly) normalized by the first or last measure point or the absolute of the maximum or
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 174

minimum (maximum negative) data value. The displacement data may also be zeroed
by subtracting the value at the first data point from all data points. Finally, the dis-
placement data may be compensated for linear drift that occurs over the course of the
measurement. This final option may be allowed or suppressed depending on future
Filter policy. This Filter is distributed in company with the Piezo Task. The Piezo
Task must be purchased for this Filter to operate.

5. Retain Filter ( ) - This Filter takes data only from Retain Tasks It cannot accept
data from other Filters. Input is taken from exactly two Retain Tasks (or a single Re-
tain Task twice, though this is not of practical value). Any combination of the Top
and Bottom measurements from Pulse one and/or Pulse two may be plotted for both
input Tasks. The purpose of the Filter is to allow direct comparison of the two meas-
urements. This is the most practical use of the Retain Tasks.

V.6: A Note on Tasks and Program Versioning
It is important to regard Vision as a collection of programs in which Vision is distinguished from
the Tasks that perform within it. Vision provides the framework for Test Definition execution. It
manages the EDITOR, the Library and the DataSet Explorer. It provides menus and responds to
the selection of their options. It manages the Database and the Archiving of data into a DataSet.

Each Task constitutes a unique program, independent of Vision. Tasks can be added, modified or
updated with no change to the Vision program. New and altered Tasks are updated simply by
dropping their *.vlr file into the proper directory. Tasks may added and/or altered on a daily ba-
sis. Though they will maintain the root version number of Vision, their versions may be incre-
mented repeatedly and differ considerably one from the other and all from Vision. Tasks released
with Version 5.13 will maintain version numbers of 5.13.0 until changed. As they change, they
will adopt version numbers 5.13.x, with x increasing serially as the Task changes. The Vision
version will remain fixed at 5.13.y. y will change only as the Vision framework itself changes.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 175

VII - Global User Variables

VII: Global User Variables
Global User Variables are a very important entity in Vision. They are probably better understood
by using them than by this brief description. After reading this description, please refer to Tuto-
rial II, the discussion of the Branch Task, etc. to better understand this topic.

The Vision software maintains a long list of experimental parameters that may be referred to by
the user for a variety of purposes. Parameters are specified by name and have a type (Real, Inte-
ger, Text or Boolean) and a value The length and composition of the list depends on the Tasks
that have been accessed either in programming the experiment, in running QuikLook measure-
ments or by creating or opening experiments in earlier DataSets (See the discussions below for a
description of QuikLook and DataSet objects.) A Task may add any number of named and typed
values to the Global User Variable list. Measurement Tasks may add both configuration and
measurement result variables to the list. For example a Hysteresis Task will add Hysteresis De-
lay and P Max to the list (along with many other parameters.) A complete list of parameters is giv-
en in the User Variables help topic. Global User Variables can be displayed along with prompt
strings in a variety of Tasks to allow the user to track the progress of some important parameter.
The values are also used as control parameters in the Automatic Exit, Branch and Automatic
Branch Abort Tasks. For example a Branch Task may include a Waveform Task in its Branch
Loop. The Waveform Task may have its duration altered by scaling by a factor greater than 1.0.
The Branch Task, in turn, may examine the Current Waveform Duration Global User Variable
and continue to branch to the Branch Target until the Current Waveform Duration exceeds some
duration. The Branch Task itself adds a Loop Counter as a Global User Variable. This might also
be used to control the Branching.

In general, values of three types are maintained as User Variables...

1. Parameters that change during program execution. These might include, for example,
voltages that are adjusted in a Branch Loop. Waveform, DC Bias and Delay Task dura-
tion is maintained as a value that can be altered from execution-to-execution.
2. Parameters that are of informative use, such as Sample Name or Area.
3. Value such as P* in PUND or PMax in Hysteresis that are returned as the result of a meas-
urement.

Users may add their own custom User Variables for their own purposes. They may also update
the value of any User Variable during the execution sequence of a Test Definition. This tool is
intended for use with custom User Variables only, but there is no method for preventing auto-
matic User Variables from being controlled by the User.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 176

VIII - QuikLook and Exporting

VIII: QuikLook

VIII.1: Discussion
Most Hardware Tasks appear not only in the Library, but on the main menu bar under the Qui-
kLook label. Selecting a Task in the QuikLook menu allows it to be configured and executed
immediately without the need to design an experiment or create or open a DataSet. (See the dis-
cussion below on DataSets.) The purpose of the QuikLook option is to allow a quick review of
the response of a sample without concern regarding the maintenance of the resulting data. This
might be used, for example, to locate a wafer that is acceptable for further, more formal testing.
QuikLook is not normally intended to save the measured data.

When a Task is selected in the QuikLook menu (Figure 1), a configuration dialog will appear
(Figure 2). For the DC Bias and Waveform Tasks, this is a single page. For most other Tasks
this dialog is two-paged, with the second page allowing the plot to be configured. (Hysteresis
Task Figures 4 and 5 .)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 177

Figure 1 – QuikLook Menu with DC Bias Task Selected.

Figure 2 – QuikLook configuration dialog for DC Bias – User Vari-
ables are shown in the list box labeled Parameter to Append to
Prompt.
Once the Task is configured, it will be executed on the current sample and its execution dis-
played. In the case of DC Bias and Waveform, execution appears as a progress dialog (Figure
3). For the measurement Tasks and the RT66A and RT6000 Import Filters the results are dis-
played on a dialog that includes a plot and fields that indicate configuration and measurement
result parameters.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 178

Figure 3 – QuikLook progress dialog for DC Bias stress. The
prompt text "Current DC Bias Time (s):" has the User Variable
“Current Bias Time” value of 100 appended to it.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 179

Figure 4 – Hysteresis Task QuikLook Configuration Dialog with
Main and Plot Setup Tabs.

Figure 5 – Hysteresis Task QuikLook Plot Configuration Dialog.
VIII.2: Saving QuikLook Data
Although QuikLook measurements are not normally intended to be used to save data, there will

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 180

certainly be occasions in which it is important or even imperative that the measured data be
saved. Several options are available to maintain a record of the data. One feature of Measure-
ment QuikLook Tasks is to allow the user to create a DataSet from the results of the QuikLook
measurement. For complete understanding, see the discussion of DataSets below. The results
dialogs contain an labeled list box just above the Task Instructions button. The list box offers
"Do Not Save" (default), "Save to Open DataSet" and "Save to New DataSet" options. If "Save
to New DataSet" is selected before closing the dialog, the process of creating a new DataSet will
be initiated. This option will be of value if a sample is found on which further experimentation is
desired. The single measurement Task becomes the Current Test Definition (CTD) in the new
DataSet, and the measured results will be added to the Executed Test Definition (ETD) in the
Archive. More detail regarding this option is reserved until after DataSets have been fully intro-
duced. "Save to Open DataSet" requires that a DataSet be opened in the DataSet Explorer.

Figure 6a – Hysteresis QuikLook Results Dialog with Export Button
and DataSet Saving Option.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 181

Figure 6b – Hysteresis QuikLook Results Tabbed (Reduced) View
Dialog.
VIII.3: Exporting QuikLook Data
Another method of saving data from Tasks executed in QuikLook is to export their data using
plotting tools discussed elsewhere. A more efficacious method for exporting is provided directly
within Vision. An Export button has been added to the QuikLook results dialog as in Figure 6 .

When this button is clicked an Export dialog appears (Figure 7).

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 182

Figure 7 – The Export Dialog - Print Export Features.
Here the user may choose one of eight options:

1. Print - The Task data, including configuration and measured data, are sent to the default
printer. A printer setup dialog will appear when the results dialog is closed (Figure 8).
The printer option allows the user to adjust output line spacing, tab size and left margin.
These values should be adjusted to create a proper output to the printer attached to the
Precision tester or tester host computer. For most measurement Tasks, the dialog includes
a Header Only control. When checked, line-by-line output of measured data is disabled to
eliminate many output pages that include only columns of number. The printer dialog of
Figure 8 appears only when the Data Presentation dialog is closed. Printing may be can-
celled from this dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 183

Figure 8 – Standard Windows Printer Configuration Dialog.
2. Export Text - The Task data, including configuration and measured data, are written to a
text file in preformatted fashion.

Text output may not always align vertically. However, the user specifies a delimiter to
segment the data into columns. When the data are imported into Excel, Origin or other
data manipulation program they will align properly based on the selected delimiter.

Figure 9 – Text File Output Configuration with Column Delimiter
Selection.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 184

The Browse for File Name button is enabled for this selection and must be used to identi-
fy an output file path and file name. The output file may, but need not, exist. If it exists,
text output will be appended to the existing text file.

The text file will not be created until the Data Presentation dialog is closed.

Figure 10 – Browse to Establish a File Path and File Name.
3. Export Excel - The Excel program is opened and Task data, including configuration and
measured data, are written into the spreadsheet. A file name may be provided but is not
required. If no file name is provided, the user will be prompted to provide one when the
Excel spreadsheet is closed. If the specified file name already exists, the user will be
prompted to overwrite. Microsoft Office 2000 or later must be installed on the Precision
tester or host computer for this function to operate. Excel output and file saving will not
occur until the Data Presentation dialog is closed.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 185

Figure 11 – Exporting to Microsoft Excel. The File Name is
Optional.
4. Export Word - The Word program is opened and Task data, including configuration and
measured data, are written into the document. A file name may be provided but is not re-
quired. If no file name is provided, the user will be prompted to provide one when the
Word document is closed. If the specified file name already exists, the user will be
prompted to overwrite. Microsoft Office 2000 or later must be installed on the Precision
tester or host computer for this function to operate. As with Printer output, the Word op-
tion allows the user to select Header Only, eliminating lengthy columns of numbers.
Word output and file saving will not occur until the Data Presentation dialog is closed.

5. Vision Data File Exporting - The option is available to Measurement Tasks and most
Filter Tasks. Here a Task-specific file is created that contains complete Task configura-
tion information and measured data. Subsequent executions of the same Task type can be
configured to read their data in from an exported file, rather than performing a measure-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 186

ment. They will also take on the configuration of the original Task that wrote the file.
This simple mechanism provides a powerful advantage in that a single execution of a
Task can now have its data passed into any DataSet and data can be shared among Da-
taSets. This option requires that a file path and file name be specified. The utility of this
feature is demonstrated in Figure 12. Vision Data File output will not occur until the Da-
ta Presentation dialog is closed.

Figure 12 – Example Utility of Vision Data File Exporting.
6 - 8. Export Metafile, Export JPEG, Export Bitmap - These export options write the
image of the plotted data to the selected image file type. The actual plotted image is used
to create the output file. Unlike all other Export options, therefore, the output file is creat-
ed as soon as the Export subdialog is closed and before the Data Presentation dialog is
closed. An output file path and file name is required. File extensions are *.wmf, *.jpg and
*.bmp, respectively.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 187

IX - EDITOR and Test Definitions

IX: The EDITOR Window and Experiment (Test Definition) Design.
For Tasks other than those initiated under the QuikLook menu, an experiment, or Test Definition
must be constructed and moved into a DataSet for execution. The experiment consists of a se-
quence of Tasks of nearly arbitrary order and number. The construction and configuration of the
Test Definition is performed entirely within the EDITOR window where Tasks are arranged se-
quentially, from-top-to-bottom, in the order that they are to execute. As new Tasks are added to
the Test Definition they are appended to the bottom of the list.

Figure 1 – EDITOR Window with a Partially Constructed Experi-
ment or Test Definition Consisting of a Pause Task, a DC Bias Task
and a Hysteresis Task.
By default, the EDITOR window (Figure 1) is located at the upper right of the Vision program
screen. When the program starts, this window will be empty if the " Tools->Reload Editor Test
Definition on Startup" menu option is unchecked. Otherwise, any Test Definition in the EDITOR
when the program was last closed will be reloaded. The EDITOR is closely linked with the Li-
brary window. A Test Definition is constructed by moving Tasks from the Library into the EDI-
TOR Window in the order that they are to appear in the experiment. A Task is inserted by select-
ing it in the Library with the left mouse button. It is dragged to the EDITOR by moving the
mouse into the EDITOR window with the left button continuously held down. (This is known as
Drag-and-Drop and is familiar to users of the Windows Explorer (Figure 2). When the cursor is
in the EDITOR window and the mouse button is released, the configuration dialog for the Task
will appear (Figure 3). Note that the Task has not yet been added to the Test Definition and if
the configuration dialog is Canceled, the Task will not be added to the EDITOR window. The
Task may also be moved into the EDITOR by right-clicking it in the TASK LIBRARY and se-
lecting "To Editor" from the popup menu. (Note that QuikLook Tasks are indicated by " (QL)" in
the Task Library. QuikLook configuration and execution may be initiated by double-clicking the
Task in the Library, or by right-clicking and selecting "QuikLook Execute".)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 188

Figure 2 – Task from Library to EDITOR.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 189

Figure 3 – Second Hysteresis to be added to the Test Definition in
the EDITOR. The Dialog opened as a result of dragging and drop-
ping the Hysteresis task from the Library to the EDITOR. Once
configured, it will be added to the Test Definition. If Cancel d, it will
not be added to the EDITOR Task list.
Once a Task is completely configured, clicking OK in its configuration dialog will insert it into
the EDITOR. A Task may be reconfigured any number of times by double-clicking it with the
left mouse button in the EDITOR. This action will reopen the configuration dialog. The EDITOR
menu option on the main menu panel includes an option to clear the EDITOR. This will delete
all Tasks in the Test Definition. The most-recently-added Task may also be deleted from the end
of the list of Tasks. A completely general EDITOR, that allows Tasks to be inserted and deleted
anywhere in the list and allows Tasks to be moved up and down within the list is not available
due to complex interdependencies between certain types of Tasks, such as Filters or the Branch
Task, and the Tasks that they associate with.

Once a Test Definition is constructed and properly configured it may be moved into the DataSet
(see discussion below). But another option in the EDITOR menu is to send “TD to Customized
Test”. If this option is exercised, a dialog first appears that allows the user to name the Test Def-
inition ( Figure 4a ). The Test Definition is then copied, maintaining both the Task sequencing

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 190

and the specific configuration of each Task, into the Library under the folder “Customized Test”
where it appears as a single icon associated with the name entered into the dialog ( Figure 4b ).
If no previous Customized Tests are available, the folder will be created. The Customized Test is
now available, with a single drag-and-drop, for all future Test Definition construction as if it
were a single Task. When it is moved back into the EDITOR it will expand and appear as the
sequence of Tasks. The Customized Test may be appended to a Test Definition that already con-
tains Tasks and may have Tasks appended to it in the EDITOR. Once the Customized Test is ex-
panded into the Task list in the EDITOR, the member Tasks may be reconfigured by double-
clicking. The Library menu option includes an option to “Delete Customized Test”. Selecting
this option will present a dialog that shows a complete list of the available Customized Tests.
Any number of tests may be selected and deleted at each instance of the delete dialog. Note that
deleting a Customized Test, unlike unregistering a DataSet, occurs immediately and is a perma-
nent action.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 191

Figure 4 – Library with User-Defined Customized Test Added to it.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 192

In addition to adding Tasks to the Test Definition in the EDITOR as described, the Test Defini-
tion can be modified in several ways...

1. All Tasks can be cleared so that there is no Test Definition in the EDITOR. This option
can be exercised from the main Vision E d itor menu, from the popup menu that appears
when the right mouse button is clicked with the cursor in the EDITOR window or by
pressing <Ctrl-A>.

Figure 5 – EDITOR "Clear All" Operation.
2. The single most recently added Task can be removed from the end of the Test Definition
list. This operation can be repeated until some interior unwanted Task has been removed,
and then the remaining Tasks reinstalled. This option can be exercised from the main Vi-
sion E d itor menu, from the popup menu that appears when the right mouse button is
clicked with the cursor in the EDITOR window or by pressing <Ctrl-L>.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 193

Figure 6 – EDITOR "Remove Last Task" Operation.
3. The Current Test Definition (CTD) in a DataSet can be moved back to the EDITOR for
reconfiguration. If there is a Test Definition in the EDITOR, the CTD Tasks will be ap-
pended. This is discussed in more detail in the DataSets discussion below.

4. An Executed Test Definition (ETD) in a DataSet Archive can be moved back to the EDI-
TOR for reconfiguration. If there is a Test Definition in the EDITOR, the ETD Tasks will
be appended. This is discussed in more detail in the DataSets discussion.

5. The remaining right-click popup menu options are detailed in more-advanced discus-
sions, below.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 194

X - DataSets and the DataSet Explorer

X.1: Discussion.
To the left of the Vision program screen (by default) is a window labeled “Explorer” (Figure 1).
Initially empty, as new DataSets are registered into the program, this window will list the regis-
tered DataSets. (Current installations should show the sample tutorial DataSets registered in this
window.) DataSets may be placed anywhere on the Vision host hard disk. There hard disk folder
location will be represented by their location in the DataSet Explorer tree. Registered DataSets
may be opened in any number in the Explorer. Each open DataSet will be accompanied by an
additional tabbed window of the same name as the DataSet. Each open DataSet will also show a
Log Window in the main user space (Figure 1). The Log Windows may be maximized or mini-
mized. If the log window is closed, the DataSet will also be closed. A DataSet may be opened by
selecting it in the Explorer and choosing the File-> Open DataSet menu option. When a new Da-
taSet is created, it is automatically opened and registered. DataSets may be unregistered from the
Explorer by selecting Explorer-> Unregister DataSet... (or by clicking the Vision toolbar
icon). In this case a dialog appears listing all registered DataSets. Any number of DataSets may
be selected. These will not be unregistered until the next time the Vision program is run. A Da-
taSet may not be unregistered if it is open. An unregistered DataSet remains on the hard disk and
may be reregistered by selecting Explorer-> Register DataSet... from the menu. (Or by clicking

the Vision toolbar icon.) A browser dialog appears from which the DataSet file is selected.
Figure 2 shows both the "Register DataSet" and "Unregister DataSet" dialogs.

Figure 1 – DataSet Explorer with registered demonstration Da-
taSets. DataSets are shown as entries in the Explorer and as tabbed
pages at the bottom of the Explorer. Only open DataSets will appear
as tabbed pages. The Log Window is open next to the Explorer. It
reflects the creation of Help Pages Demo One.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 195

Figure 2 - DataSet Register and Unregister Dialogs.
So what is a DataSet? The Vision software is designed with the philosophy that what is im-
portant in researching a memory technology is the maintenance and analysis of the history of
stimuli applied to a sample. A DataSet is a repository for a history of experimentation. Although
it may be used in any way the user deems fit, the DataSet might normally be associated with a
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 196

single Lot, Wafer, Die or Module. Used in this way, the DataSet will provide a complete record
of experimentation performed on its associated process stage. Or it may be used to store a partic-
ular type of experiment. A DataSet consists of the following elements:

1. DataSet Name. This is provided by the user at the time the new DataSet is created. It
should be uniquely descriptive of the purpose of the DataSet.

2. DataSet Info. This is a set of information provided at DataSet creation or during the up-
date of the DataSet. It includes a comment field to allow detailed description of the Da-
taSet and its intended purpose, a required field to contain the user’s initials and date of
creation and date of last update. (Figure 1)

3. Current Test Definition (CTD). This is an experiment or Test Definition that is ready
for execution (Figure 3) . Selecting DataSet-> Execute Current Test Definition (CTD)
from the menu, or pressing <F1>, will initiate the operation of the programmed Test Def-
inition contained in the CTD on the sample connected to the Precision Tester. The CTD
is written by clicking on the Test Definition in the EDITOR with the left mouse button.
With the button held down, the mouse is dragged into the open DataSet window. With
the cursor in the DataSet window, the button is released. (The Test Definition in the ED-
ITOR can also be moved to the CTD by selecting Editor-> Test Definition to Current Da-
taSet from the menu or by right-clicking in the EDITOR window.) When the Test Defini-
tion is moved a dialog will open to allow the user to assign a name to the CTD (Figure
4). The name should uniquely identify the Current Test Definition. If a Current Test Def-
inition exists in the DataSet, it will be overwritten by the new Test Definition. The con-
figuration of each Task in the Current Test Definition can be reviewed by double-clicking
on the Task in the CTD, opening its configuration dialog. This will be only a review as
the dialog controls are disabled and cannot be adjusted. (Figure 5) The CTD can be re-
peatedly re-executed any number of times. When the DataSet is closed and reopened,
even between executions of the Vision program, the CTD will be maintained. CTDs can
be returned to the EDITOR or sent to the Customized Tests folder in the Library by se-
lecting the appropriate option from the DataSet menu. A popup menu can also be used by
selecting the Current Test Definition name in the DataSet Explorer, then right-clicking.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 197

Figure 3 – DataSet Tab in Explorer with CTD.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 198

Figure 4 – CTD Naming/Renaming Dialog.

Figure 5 – Task Configuration Dialog in Review Mode.
4. Archive. This is a repository for all previous executions of the CTD or earlier manifesta-
tions of the CTD (Figure 6). It consists of a number of Executed Test Definitions
(ETDs). Each ETD takes the name of the CTD that was active when the ETD was creat-
ed. To resolve duplicate name issues, a serial value is appended to the ETD name and
separated from it by a “:”. The serial value begins at 0 and is incremented indefinitely un-
til the CTD is renamed, at which time it is reset to 0. Each ETD contains two subfolders
labeled “Experiment Design” and “Experiment Data”. The Experiment Design folder
contains a duplicate of the CTD that was active when the ETD was created. The “Exper-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 199

iment Data” folder contains a copy of each executed Task. The folders may differ in size
as Branch Looping will allow a Task to execute many times and be represented by many
copies in the Experiment Data folder. This is the reason for the existence of the “Experi-
ment Design” folder. The experiment cannot necessarily be reconstructed from the Data.
Double-clicking any Task in the Experiment Data folder will open its configuration dia-
log for review. No alterations may be made. If the Task is a Measurement Task, when the
dialog is closed a second dialog will open that shows the data plot and configuration and
measurement results. This is the same dialog shown by the QuikLook option, but the
"Save to Open DataSet"/"Save to New DataSet" control is does not appear. (Figure 7). If
the Task is a Branch or one of the two Exit Tasks, a dialog will appear after the configu-
ration dialog that will indicate if the Branch or Exit occurred.

As with the QuikLook results dialog, the Export functionality is available for measure-
ment Tasks recalled from the ETD.

Figure 6 – DataSet Explorer with the Demonstration DataSet tab
page open. The Current Test Definition named "Main Manual
Demo TD" holds a Pause Task, a DC Bias Task and a Hysteresis
Task. The Archive is open to show three Executed Test Definitions:
Main Manual Demo TD:0, :1 and :2. Main Manual Demo TD:2 is
open to show the "Experiment Design" folder. This is a copy of the
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 200

CTD. "Experiment Data" contains copies of the executed Tasks.

Figure 7a - Hysteresis Plot Showing Data Recalled from the DataSet
Archive.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 201

Figure 7b - Tabbed (Reduced) Hysteresis Plot Showing Data Re-
called from the DataSet Archive.
X.2: Creating a DataSet.
Under normal circumstances, a DataSet is created for association with a particular sample, type
of sample or type of experiment. The DataSet is opened, then a Test Definition is created in the

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 202

EDITOR, moved into the DataSet as the CTD and executed on a sample. The creation process is
initiated by selecting File-> New DataSet, by clicking the Page icon on the Vision toolbar or by
pressing <Ctrl-N> (Figure 8). When initiated a dialog will appear in which the DataSet Name,
File Name and Experimenter Initials are established. An optional field also allows descriptive
comments to be entered (Figure 9). The process can be terminated at this point by clicking Can-
cel. If OK is clicked the DataSet will be created, added to the DataSet Explorer and a tab window
will be added to the DataSet Explorer in which the empty DataSet is opened (Figure 10). Note
that the DataSet file will be placed in "C:\DataSets" by default. This path can be changed to suit
the user's needs.

Figure 8 - Initiating DataSet Creation.

Figure 9 - DataSet Creation Dialog.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 203

NOTE: The DataSet Path control is automatically updated to assign the DataSet Name value as
the DataSet File Name, with a *.dst extension. If the DataSet Name control is edited, the DataSet
Path is automatically updated to be "C:\File Path\DataSet Name". This automatic updating may
be defeated by using the Browse button to assign the file path and file name or by editing directly
in the DataSet Path control. "C:\DataSets" is the default root folder. It will be replaced in further
updates to the DataSet Path control if it is changed using the Browse button or by editing direct-
ly into the DataSet Path control. Folders in the DataSet Path control need not exist when the Da-
taSet is created. The folders will be created if they are not found. This feature was added at the
request of Tohoku University and Michio Ohata-san of Kojundo Ltd. Note that, when a new Da-
taSet is created, a placeholder General Information Task, named "GI New DataSet Created"
forms the Current Test Definition (CTD). This is done so that the CTD is never empty.

Figure 10 - DataSet Explorer Tab Window for the Newly Created
DataSet.
A DataSet may also be created and/or written to by a Task that has been executed in QuikLook.
If "Save to a New DataSet" is checked before the QuikLook results dialog is closed, then the Da-
taSet creation process will begin when the dialog is closed. A new DataSet may be created. Or
the Task may be added to the current open DataSet by selecting "Save to Open DataSet". In this
case one or more DataSets must be open and a DataSet tab window must be opened in the Da-
taSet Explorer. The Task will be written to the DataSet whose tab window is open and visible.

If the QuikLook Task is written to a new DataSet, the DataSet will have that Measurement Task
as its only Task in the CTD. The Task will be configured as it was in the QuikLook measure-
ment. The DataSet Archive will contain a single ETD that consists of the executed QuikLook
Task. If the Task is recalled from the Archive, it will be configured as in the QuikLook meas-
urement. The recalled data that are displayed will be those of the QuikLook Measurement. See
Figure 11.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 204

Figure 11 - New DataSet Created from a QuikLook Hysteresis Task
Measurement.
If the QuikLook Task is written to an existing DataSet, the CTD of the open DataSet will be
overwritten by a Test Definition consisting of the single QuikLook Task configured as it was in
QuikLook. If there are more than one DataSet open, a DataSet selection dialog appears (Figure
12). A single ETD will be appended to the DataSet Archive. It will contain the single QuikLook
Task, configure as in, and with data measured in, the QuikLook execution. Figure 13 shows a
QuikLook PUND Task appended to the DataSet of Figure 11 .

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 205

Figure 12 - DataSet Selection Dialog.

Figure 13 - QuikLook PUND Measurement Appended to an
Existing DataSet.
X.3 - Rename ETD
As a DataSet is exercised by running the Current Test Definition (CTD), the history of the exe-
cution is stored in a single Executed Test Definition (ETD) in the DataSet Archive. Each ETD
contains a record of each Task as it executed, including the Task configuration and any measured
data. Each Tasks can be individually recalled for configuration and measured data review. Once
a DataSet Archive is written, it cannot be modified except by appending new executions of the
CTD as ETDs. ETDs that contain unwanted or incomplete data or were executed in error remain
part of the record and cannot be removed.

One solution is to assign a new name to the ETD. Although described as a method for marking a
DataSet that cannot be removed, this is a generic tool that can serve any purpose. An ETD is re-
named by right-clicking its name in the DataSet Archive and selecting "Rename ETD" in the
popup menu. The existing name appears in a "Rename DataSet" dialog (see below). Type a new
ETD Name, the DataSet Archive is refreshed and the ETD permanently takes on a new name.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 206

Figure 14 - Rename an ETD.
X.4 - ETD Markers
Another solution, and one that can be used in conjunction with ETD renaming, is to give the
ETD a special icon. ETDs are stored in the DataSet Archive with a standard icon. However,
one of three special icons can be assigned to any ETD. The icons are:

1. : Error
2. : Important

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 207

3. : Special Attention

Although the icons have been given the labels "Error", "Important" and "Special Attention" when
selecting them, they can take on any meaning intended by the user.

Figure 15 - Adjust the ETD Marker.
Note that the record of the marker for the ETD cannot be stored in the DataSet. Instead, a file

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 208

based on DataSet Name and ETD name is stored in C:\DataSets\Notes. Since the file is based on
the ETD name, make any changes to the ETD name (X.4) before setting the marker. Also, make
any changes to the DataSet Name (below) before taking this action. Note, too, that removing this
file would restore the maker to its original.

Figure 16 - ETD Marker File in C:\DataSet\Notes.
X.5 - ETD Notes
Another tool is available that allows an individual ETD to have a Rich Text-formatted document
of up to 2000 characters associated with it. As a Rich Text document, the text can be formatted
for color, and type style (bold, italic, etc.). Once created, the document can be recalled for re-
view, editing or deleting. The document is stored in C:\DataSets\Notes and is associated with an
ETD by DataSet Name, ETD name and execution count. (Note that it is possible to associate the
note with multiple ETDs through manipulations that cause duplicate ETD names and execution
counts in the DataSet. This would be an error condition.)

To add an ETD note, open the DataSet and its Archive, select the appropriate ETD, right-click
and select "Add Note" from the popup menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 209

Figure 17 - Initiate an ETD Note.
A dialog will appear that allows the note to be edited. The dialog will automatically add the date
of the note. A brief summary can be added, then up to 2000 characters of text to document the
ETD. The text can be formatted using the dialog menu options. It may be formatted for color and
style. The document may also be printed and/or exported to a text file from the menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 210

Figure 18 - Construct an ETD Note.
Once the note is edited, it is added to the ETD by clicking OK. The DataSet Archive will refresh
its display and close. If reopened, the ETD with the associated note will be indicated by a change
in icon to a blue "R", with a superscripted appended "n", as in Figure 19.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 211

Figure 19 - ETD with Associated Note Icon.
Once the note is associated with the ETD, right-clicking on the ETD will produce a popup menu
with "View Note", "Edit Note" and "Remove Note" enabled. These actions are mostly intuitive.
Editing an existing ETD note has some nuances that are best addressed by referring to the Edit-
ing an ETD Note topic.

As with the ETD Marker of X.4, the ETD note is associated with an ETD through two files in
C:\DataSet\Notes. Once again, the ETD and/or DataSet should have their final name set before
adding the note, since the file depends on both the DataSet and ETD names. The icon will
supersede and special makers added in X.4.

Figure 20 - ETD Note Files in C:\DataSets\Notes.
X.6 - Rename the DataSet
At this point it should be evident that the naming of things in Vision - Tasks, DataSets, Test Def-
initions - is critical both for documentation purposes and for program execution. Duplicate
names, though legal in the case of Tasks, can cause particular problems. There may be occasions
in which it is efficacious or even necessary to permanently change a DataSet name. The process
is simple. With a DataSet closed, select it, by name, in the DataSet Explorer. Then go to "Ex-
plorer->Rename Selected DataSet". The current DataSet Name will appear in the "Change Da-
taSet Name" dialog. Adjust the name as desired and click OK. The DataSet name will be perma-
nently updated in the DataSet Explorer.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 212

Figure 21 - Rename a DataSet.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 213

XI - Data Plotting
X.1 : Data Plotting
Measured data can be displayed to the user in three ways. Data taken using the QuikLook option
will be automatically displayed in a dialog after they are acquired. Data acquired in a DataSet
can be similarly viewed by double-clicking on the recorded Measurement Task in the Experi-
ment Data folder of the Executed Test Definition (ETD) after the Current Test Definition (CTD)
has complete execution. This will present the configuration dialog for review, then show the plot
dialog. During actual experiment execution data can be viewed by associating one or more Filter
Tasks with the measurements of interest and enabling the Filter’s plot option. The plot window
will appear and be updated during the execution of the CTD. There are many options for plotting
data in this way. See the Help option under the Filter configuration dialog. Figure 1 shows a
QuikLook General Pulse Task response dialog including the plotted data. A typical Filter Task
data presentation, taken during Task execution (or recalled from the DataSet Archive), is shown
in Figure 2 .

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 214

Figure 1a and b - Dialog that results from a QuikLook General
Pulse measurement. The top and bottom of each pulse is plotted
against an X-axis that has no real meaning. Data are plotted from
left to right in the sequence taken. On the full dialog derived meas-
urement results are shown to the right. Derived measurement re-
sults are shown to the right. Data validity indicators are at the lower
right.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 215

Figure 2 – Filter plot created during the program execution. This
plot is created as the data are measured. Multiple plots may be cre-
ated in a single execution. Plots may contain more than one data
source. In a Branch Loop, a new plot may be created for each loop,
or the data may be appended to a single plot. This shows data from
three 10.0 ms Hysteresis sources of drive voltages varying from 4.0
to 10.0 Volts. To the right is a full textual experiment description
created by the Hysteresis Tasks that sourced the data.
X.2 - Right-Click Options
Once data are plotted a large number of plotting options are available to the user. These are ac-
cessed by placing the cursor into the plot window and clicking the right button. A popup menu
will appear ( Figure 3 ) that directs the user to one of several options. The window may be max-
imized, being reduced again by pressing the ‘Esc’ key. Selecting the Customization Dialog... op-
tion will open a multi-paged dialog ( Figure 4 ) that will allow, among other things, rewriting
titles, enabling or disabling the grids, adjusting the axis scales, adjusting the data color, line type
and/or symbols, changing font, etc.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 216

Figure 3 – QuikLook Results for General Pulse Showing Right-
Click Popup Menu.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 217

Figure 4 – Same as Figure 3, with the Customization Dialog Pre-
sented.
In order to send the plot to the printer, right-click in the plotting surface and select "Export Dia-
log..." When the dialog appears, select the output type (Enhanced Metafile [EMF], Metafile
[WMF], bitmap [BMP], JPEG [JPG] or PNG), and Printer. Click Print... and acknowledge the
desired printer. Landscape or Portrait modes can be selected by clicking Setup... in the Printing
dialog. Page size, etc may also be adjusted using Setup... The sequence is shown in Figure 5.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 218

The export dialog can also be used to save the plot to a file of the selected type or to save it on
the clipboard for pasting into another document. It can be imported into a spreadsheet, drawing
program or word processor from the clipboard or the Meta File. Note that when printing or sav-
ing the plot, only the plot portion of the dialog applies. Portions of the dialog containing other
controls will not be printed or saved to the file pr clipboard. Note that the export feature of Vi-
sion, accessed through the Export button on the results dialog, provides a simpler, more complete
and better-formatted method of sending data to a printer, an Excel file or a text file. However,
data sent to a printer using Vision export will not include the data plot.

Figure 5a – Plot Printing Sequence 1. Right-Click and Select "Ex-
port Dialog ...".

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 219

Figure 5b – Plot Printing Sequence 2. Export Dialog Configured for
Printing.

Figure 5c – Plot Printing Sequence 3. Typical Windows Printing
Dialog. Click Setup... for Additional Configuration.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 220

Figure 5d – Plot Printing Sequence 4. Typical Printer Configuration
Subdialog.
Zooming in on data of interest can be performed automatically without manually adjusting the
axis limits. To do this, place the cursor adjacent to the data of interest. Click and hold the left
button and drag the cursor over the data forming a rectangular window, originating at the spot
that the button was clicked and completely containing the data of interest. When the button is
released, the view will expand so that it contains only the window that was created by the click-
and-drag (rubber band) method. Return to normal zoom by right-clicking in the window and se-
lecting Undo Zoom in the popup window. A zooming sequence is shown in Figures 6 and 7.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 221

Figure 6 - "Rubber Band" a Region of Interest to Zoom in on Using
the Left Mouse Button.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 222

Figure 7 - Zoomed Data.
X.3 - Annotations
A limited set of annotation tools is available to data plots that appear in dialogs in which menus
may appear. Long duration Measurement Tasks and Filter Tasks present data in a plot window
such as in Figures 6 and 7, that do not allow menuing and do not include annotations. All other
Measurement Tasks allow annotations to be added. Figure 8 shows two samples of ellipses, lines
and text annotations. The following annotations and their styles may be added:

1. Lines - Line type and color.
2. Rectangles - Line type and color
3. Ellipses - Line type and color
4. Text - Text size and color
5. Symbol - With or without text, symbol type and color

The current line type and color apply to Lines, Rectangles and Ellipses. These do not maintain
discrete configurations. All color selections include Black, Blue, Red, Green, Yellow and Cus-
tom. Line types include:

1. Thin Solid
2. Medium Solid
3. Thick Solid
4. Dotted
5. Dashed

Text sizes are:

1. Tiny
2. Small
3. Medium
4. Large
5. Very Large

Changes to text size apply to all existing text on the plot as well as the future addition of text.
This is the only property that can be changed for annotations that have already been placed on
the plot.

Symbol types are:

1. Dot - Open or Solid
2. Square- Open or Solid
3. Diamond - Open or Solid
4. Triangle - Up or Down, Open or Solid
5. Plus (+)
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 223

6. Cross (X)

Figure 8 - Plot with Annotations.
Annotations are configured and initiated by selection adjacent to the cursors option in Tasks that
offer cursors. In pulse Tasks, such as the General Pulse of Figure 8, the annotation menu has
been added to the plot dialog that does not include cursors.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 224

Figure 9 - Various Annotation Configuration Actions.
The configuration action will be reflected in the plot dialog's Annotation indicator. The indicator
will either reflect the most-recent annotation configuration action or provide instruction when
annotations are being added. If annotation operations are idle, the control will show <<Ready>>.

Figure 10 - Annotation Indicator.
Once the annotations are configured as desired, click the "Add Annotation" menu option and se-
lect the annotation type. If this is the first annotation to be inserted, the left mouse button must be
clicked anywhere in the plot surface to change the focus. The left button is then used to define

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 225

the annotation limits. For lines, the mouse is clicked twice, once at each end point. For rectangles
and ellipses the mouse is clicked twice. The first click selects one corner of a rectangle that de-
fines the limits of the annotation. The second click defines the opposite corner - both horizontally
and vertically of the defining rectangle. Symbols and text annotations require only a single click.
For text annotations and symbols with text, the click defines the position of the left-most part of
the annotation. If text is to be inserted, the mouse click is followed by a dialog in which the text
is entered. There is a 48-character limit to the text length.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 226

Figure 11 - Adding an Ellipse.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 227

Figure 12 - Adding a Symbol with Text.
Tabbed Data Presentation dialogs do not include menus. For tabbed dialogs, annotation control
(and cursor controls when available) is performed using dialog button controls.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 228

Figure 13 - Tabbed Data Presentation Annotation Controls.
The figures in this section show annotations added to a QuikLook plot. Once the QuikLook re-
sponse dialog is closed, the annotations are lost. However, if a plot dialog, recalled from a Da-
taSet Archive, has annotations applied, the list of annotations is saved to a file in
C:\DataSets\Annotations. The file has the name <DataSet Name>.<Task Name>.<Execution
Count>.mm.dd.yy hh.mm.ss AM/PM. The annotation file is, therefore, very specific to the Task.
When the Task is recalled from the DataSet Archive again, the previously-added annotations will
appear.

Note that once the annotations are placed on a plot, the only modifications possible are to add

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 229

new annotations or to remove all annotations as a group. The only other change that can be gen-
erally applied is to change text size for all text and symbols with text annotations. Annotations
cannot be individually removed. They cannot have their properties changed or be moved. These
actions will be the subject of future Vision releases.

X.4 - Global Plotting Options
The global default settings for data plotting can be adjusted in the main Vision "Data Plotting"
menu. Options include plot type (line, points, etc.), grid control, font size, etc. See the Data Plot-
ting Vision menu help page for more detail.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 230

XII - Variable Task Icons

Version Tasks are grouped into general types that are identified by Task location in the TASK
LIBRARY and QuikLook (if applicable) and by Task icon. The general icons are listed in Table
1.

Icon Task Type
Program Control Task (Pause, De-
lay, General Information, Etc.)
Hardware Task that makes no
measurement (Waveform, DC Bias)
Sync Trigger Task
Measurement Task (Hysteresis, Fa-
tigue, etc.)
Transistor Measurement Task (to be
introduced in future releases)
Long-Duration Measurement Tasks
(Fatigue, Imprint, Resist, Retain,
etc.)
Magneto-Electric Sensor Calibra-
tion
Pulse Tasks (PUND, General Pulse,
Simple Pulse)
External Instrument Task (Generic
GPIB, Set Temperature, LCR Me-
teretc.)
Filter Task (averaging, math, etc.)
Branch Task
Nesting Branch Task
General Information Task
Customized Test
Table 1 - General Task Type Identifying Icons.
One of multiple icons can appear for any given Task in a Test Definition. Each Task is assigned
the appropriate icon from Table 1 when it appears in the Library. This same icon is used for
most representations of a Task in the EDITOR, a DataSet Current Test Definition (CTD) or a
DataSet Executed Test Definition (ETD) in the DataSet Archive. However, the Task appearance
may change in the EDITOR or a DataSet CTD if it is associated with a Branch Task or one or
more Filter Tasks or both. In that case the icon is augmented by a blue dot on the icon's left bor-
der when it is a Branch Target and by a brown rectangle in the lower-right corner when it is as-
sociated with one or more Filters. Both icons may appear if the Task is associated with both a
Branch Task and Filters. In addition, a Task may appear with a red icon in a DataSet ETD if
there was an error during execution. In all cases, the basic icon from Table 1 is retained as a ba-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 231

sis for the variable icon. Note that Tasks in DataSets created prior to the Version 4.1.x up-
date will not display variable icons, nor will they be displayed if a Test Definition is moved
from the older DataSet back to the EDITOR unless the Branch or Filter Task is reconfig-
ured and the association reassigned.

The figures below show the various situations.

Figure 1 - Hysteresis Icons - Branch Target and Filter Association.

Figure 2 - Hysteresis Icons - Single Task as Branch Target and Fil-
ter Associate.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 232

Figure 3 - Hysteresis Error Icons - The ETDs Hold Hysteresis Tasks
with Forced Errors.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 233

XIII - Nested Branch Looping

The Nested Branch allows Nested Branch Looping by allowing Branch Tasks (and their target
Tasks) to be included in the Nested Branch Loop. The Branch Task defines an inner loop and the
Nested Branch Task an outer loop. As originally conceived the use of the Nested Branch Task
was confusing and its purpose difficult to grasp. This was primarily because the user was strong-
ly cautioned against including Measurement and Filter Tasks within the inner Branch Loop. In
this situation the inner loop could only be used for GPIB or program control. A simple mecha-
nism has been added to Vision to make Nested Branch Looping simpler and more useful. The
Nested Branch Loop has added a Boolean User Variable, called "Reset", added by the Nested
Branch Loop Task, that can be used by Hardware Tasks, Measurement Tasks and Filters to re-
turn there configuration to the original state in a Branch Loop. Consider the Test Definition of
Figure 1...

Figure 1 - Nested Branch Loop Test Definition.
The Tasks are defined as follows:

1. Set Temperature 50°C to 100°C - Set Temperature - This Task sets a thermal controller.
Its initial temperature is 50° C. It is programmed to increment its temperature by 25° C in
a Branch Loop. It has Nested Branch Loop Reset disabled.
2. Hyst.1 - Multivolt - Reset - Hysteresis - A Hysteresis Task programmed to perform a 5.0-
Volt initial measurement and to increment its voltage by 1.0 Volts in a Branch Loop.
Nested Branch Loop Reset is enabled.
3. Hyst.2 - Multivolt - Reset - Hysteresis - A Hysteresis Task programmed to perform a 5.0-
Volt initial measurement and to increment its voltage by 1.0 Volts in a Branch Loop.
Nested Branch Loop Reset is disabled.
4. C/P Hysteresis Data - Reset - Collect/Plot Filter - The Filter Task collects data from
both preceding Hysteresis Tasks. It is programmed to append data in a Branch Loop. It is
programmed with Nested Branch Loop Reset enabled.
5. C/P Hysteresis Data - No Reset - Collect/Plot Filter - The Filter Task collects data from
both preceding Hysteresis Tasks. It is programmed to append data in a Branch Loop. It is
programmed with Nested Branch Loop Reset disabled.
6. Inner Loop - Three Times - Standard Branch - This Task is programmed to Branch
twice, causing a total of three executions of its nested Tasks. (The Branch Logic Condi-
tion is "Loop Counter <= 2".) Its Branch Target is Hyst.1 - Multivolt - Reset. This Task
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 234

automatically sets the "Reset" User Variable to "false".
7. Outer Loop - Three Times - Nested Branch - This Task is programmed to return execu-
tion to its Set Temperature 50° C to 100° C Branch Target three times. (The Branch Log-
ic Condition is "Loop Counter - Nested <= 2".) This Task is programmed by the user to
set the "Reset" flag to "true". This is a new option in the Nested Branch Task.

The Respond to Nesting Branch Reset checkbox of Figure 1 has been added to all appropriate
Hardware, Measurement and Filter Tasks to allow "Reset" to be either acknowledged or ignored.
Tasks that have Reset enabled will execute their initial conditions on first execution and after
each Nested Branch Task execution. Tasks that have Reset disabled will execute their initial
conditions only on first execution. Note that, for Filter Tasks that have Reset conditions, the con-
dition only applies if the Task is programmed in Append mode. Table 1 tracks the progress of
the execution of the Test Definition and highlights the difference between Reset enabled (green)
and Reset disabled (red) Tasks.

Outer Inner Tem- Hysteresis 1 Hysteresis 2 Filter 1 Filter 1 Filter Filter 2
Loop Iter- Loop Iter- pera- Voltage Voltage Plots Trac- 2 Trac-
ation ation ture es/Plot Plots es/Plot
(°C)
1 1 50 5.0 5.0 1 2 1 2
1 2 50 6.0 6.0 1 4 1 4
1 3 50 7.0 7.0 1 6 1 6
2 1 60 5.0 8.0 2 6/2 1 8
2 2 60 6.0 9.0 2 6/4 1 10
2 3 60 7.0 10.0 2 6/6 1 12
3 1 70 5.0 11.0 3 6/6/2 1 14
3 2 70 6.0 12.0 3 6/6/4 1 16
3 3 70 7.0 13.0 3 6/6/6 1 18
Table 1 - Task Condition at Each Test Definition Branch Iteration.
As is evident from the Table, the Reset option allows the Hysteresis Task to repeat a series of
voltages over a range of temperatures. With Reset disabled, a different range of voltages is cov-
ered at each temperature. For the Filter plot, a new plot is generated at each new temperature if
Reset is enabled. If Reset is disabled, all data are shown on a single plot.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 235

XIV - Test Definition Graphing

Introduction
A graphical representation of any Test Definition in Vision can be made and then edited, printed
and exported. This is called a Test Definition Graph. Recall that a Test Definition refers to a lin-
ear sequence of Vision Tasks that, taken together, form an experiment. There is usually a Test
Definition under construction in the EDITOR window. All DataSets contain a single Test Defini-
tion, called the Current Test Definition (CTD), which is the experiment that is ready for execu-
tion within the DataSet. The DataSet may also contain any number of archived Executed Test
Definitions (ETDs) that represent previous experiment executions in the DataSet.

Figure 1 - Various Test Definitions in Vision.
A Test Definition Graph is opened by right-clicking the appropriate Test Definition and selecting
"Graph Editor Test Definition", "Graph CTD" or "Graph ETD Design" as appropriate.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 236

Figure 2 - Initiate Test Definition Graphing.
A two-paned, scrollable window will open that details the Test Definition graphically. For the
moment, the right pane contains a simple box labeled "Mini-Graph". The box contains the se-
quence of Tasks in the Test Definition represented only by the Task icons. In addition, links be-
tween Filters and their Target Tasks are presented as brown lines. Branch Task links are present-
ed as blue lines.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 237

Figure 3 - Initial Graph.
The left pane includes more detail. Each Task is assigned a box. The initial box color depends on
Task type. In the upper right corner, the Task icon appears. It is also Task dependent. Default
values are shown in Table 1.

Task Family Type Box Color Icon
Program Control Blue
Hardware Dark Green
Measurement Light Green
External Instruments Orange
Filter Dark Brown
Long-Duration Light Brown
Branch Blue
Nesting Branch Blue

Table 1 - Icons and Box Colors by Task Family Type.
Each Task in the main window indicates Task version, compilation date and Task family/Library
location in italics along the top of the Task box. The remainder of the text in the box is provided
by the Task and details Task configuration. All Tasks first present "Task Type:" and "Task
Name:" information. Tasks that are Target Task for Filters add a brown rectangle in the lower
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 238

right corner. The rectangle is labeled "Filter Target". Likewise, Tasks that are Branch Targets
have a blue circle, labeled "Branch Target" to the middle right. Cascading link lines outside the
box show the association between Filter and Branch Tasks and their Targets.

Levels of Task Description
Tasks can be asked to provide three levels of detail to the Test Definition graph. Once a graph is
created, the level is not changed. But the level may be selected before graphing and the selected
level remains persistent - even between executions of Vision - until it is changed. The infor-
mation level is selected by right clicking, as in Figure 2, then selecting "Minimize Graph Text",
"Standard Graph Text" or "Full Graph Text". The level may also be changed by selecting "File->
Minimize Graph Output Text", "Standard Graph Output Text" or "Full Graph Output Text" in
the main Vision menu.

Minimize Text.
In the minimized text representation, all Tasks provide the same information. This includes
the italicized Task Version, compilation date and family and the Task Type and Task name
entries. Since the size of the boxes is minimized, links and symbols indication associations
between Filter and Branch Tasks and their Targets are eliminated. This information is still
provided in the Mini-Graph of the right pane.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 239

Figure 4 - Minimized Text.
Standard Text
This is the normal Task presentation. Tasks provide complete configuration information.
Full links are provided between Branch and Filter Tasks and their Targets.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 240

Figure 5 - Standard Text.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 241

Full Text.
In the Full Text presentation Tasks add just a little bit more information. All Tasks add the
Task configuration date to the bottom of the displayed Text. Hardware Tasks also add the
sample Area (cm2) and Thickness (µm) information. Finally, Measurement Tasks present the
configuration of the return signal amplification level.

Figure 6 - Full Text.
Editing Task Graphics
Any Task entry may be selected for editing within the left pane. To select a Task, simply left-
click within the Task box boundary. The Task is "Highlighted" by turning its box to a pink color,
indicating that it has been selected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 242

Figure 7 - Selecting (Highlighting) a Task for Editing.
Once a Task is selected, it may be edited in two ways. First the color of the Task box may be
changed to any desired value. Right-click anywhere within the Graph window and select
"Change Task Box Color" from the popup menu. A standard Windows Color-Picker dialog will
appear. The dialog may be expanded to allow any custom color to be selected or defined. Once
the appropriate color is established in the dialog, click OK to close the Color-Picker and set the
new Task box color.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 243

Figure 8 - Changing a Task's Box Color.
The second change that can be made is that the descriptive Task text can be edited to append any
additional information the user may choose to add. With the Task highlighted, right-click any-
where in the Graph window and select "Append to Task Text" from the popup menu. A simple
dialog will open that allows text to be entered. Text may be of any length and may include car-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 244

riage returns. Once the text is edited, click OK to append it to the existing text provided by the
Task. Once text is added it becomes "permanent". Subsequent repetitions of the process will con-
tinue to append to the previously-appended text.

Any Task can be retuned to its original color and/or text state by highlighting the Task, right-
clicking and selecting "Reset Task Text to Default" and/or "Reset Task Color to Default".

Figure 9 - Appending Text to a Task's Graph Entry.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 245

Adding Comments
An unlimited amount of text, including carriage returns, may be added to the Graph to further
document the represented Test Definition as the user sees fit. Right-click anywhere in the Graph
window and select "Graph Comments" in the popup menu. A simple text editor dialog will ap-
pear. Add any descriptive text desired, then click OK. A box containing the text will appear in
the right window pane.

Text may be reedited to an unlimited degree by reopening the "Graph Comments" dialog. The
current text will appear. It may be deleted and/or corrected and/or appended to. Once the dialog
is closed, the update text will appear in the right pane. If all text is deleted, the Comments box
will disappear.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 246

Figure 10 - Adding Comments to a Graph.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 247

Figure 11 - Editing Graph Comments.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 248

Saving and Recalling Graphs
Once the user is satisfied with the state of a Test Definition Graph, the graph may be permanent-
ly stored to a file and then recalled into a graph window at any future time. Right-click anywhere
in the Graph and select "Save As...". The standard Windows browser dialog will appear. Navi-
gate to the desired file path and set a file name. Note that the "*.grph" extension is filtered for,
but the file may take on any name and file extension. Click Save to write the file.

Figure 12 - Saving a Graph to File.
A file may be reopened into any existing graph (overwriting the previous graph) by right-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 249

clicking anywhere in the Graph window and selecting "Open..." from the popup menu. A more
common approach may be to select "File->Open a Test Definition Graph" from the main Vision
menu. In this case a new graph window will be created and the file data will be written to it. Ei-
ther of these actions will open a standard Windows browser dialog that should be used to navi-
gate to and identify the file. The dialog will have the *.grph filter, but any file name may be
used.

Figure 13 - Recalling a Graph from a File.
Closing Graphs
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 250

Each time a Graph is closed by clicking X in its upper-right corner, the user is prompted to save
the graph.

Figure 14 - Graph Save Prompt on Graph Closing.
If Yes is clicked, the save process of Figure 12 will be initiated. If No is clicked the Graph will
simply close. Cancel causes the Graph to remain open. If Graph windows are open when Vision
is closed, the user will be prompted by the dialog of Figure 14 once for each open Graph. How-
ever, <Ctrl-G> will close all open Graph windows without prompting.

Printing
Any graph may be sent to any printer accessible to the Vision host simply by right-clicking in the
Graph window and selecting "Print". A standard Windows printer configuration dialog will open
that allows the number of copies and/or pages to print to be selected. Each printout will include
at least to printed pages. The first page represents the right window pane with the Mini-Graph
and any Comments. The remaining pages show the left pane.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 251

Figure 15 - Initiating a Graph Printout.
The printout can be previewed by right-clicking and selecting "Print Preview...". Note that Print
Preview has difficulty positioning the Task icons as is evident in the figures below. This problem
does not extend to the actual printout, which should display correctly.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 252

Figure 16 - Print Preview 1.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 253

Figure 17 - Print Preview 2.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 254

Figure 18 - Print Preview 3.
Buffering Test Definition Graphs
Perhaps the most useful feature of Test Definition Graphing is the ability to copy the Graph to
the Windows Clipboard, from which it may be pasted into any standard program such as Micro-
soft Word, Excel, PowerPoint or Visio. Each of the Graph panes is independently buffered. To
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 255

capture the right pane, right-click in the right pane and select "Copy to Clipboard". The open any
suitable target program and click <Ctrl-V> or select Edit->Paste. The Mini-Graph and any
Comments will appear just as in the Graph window.

Figure 19 - Copy and Paste the Right Graph Window Pane into

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 256

Word.
The process is the same for the left window pane. This time right-click in the left pane and select
"Copy to Clipboard". Then paste into the desired program. Note the entire Test Definition Graph
is buffered on the Clipboard as a single item. For paged programs such as Word, pasting a large
Test Definition Graph may result in an object that is either clipped at the bottom or whose output
is scaled too small for proper viewing. This is the case in the partial view of Word output in Fig-
ure 20. In this case a minimized Text representation may be a better option. Such scaling will
not be an issue in an unpaged program such as the partial Excel output example of Figure 21.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 257

Figure 20 - Copy and Paste the Left Graph Window Pane into
Word.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 258

Figure 21 - Copy and Paste the Left Graph Window Pane into Excel.
Conclusion
Test Definition Graphing provides the user an important documentation tool. It allows the exper-
imenter to quickly and easily present his experiment design in any correspondence tool such as
Word or PowerPoint. The experiment may be presented at three levels of detail and may be cus-
tomized with additional text documentation. Along with the distribution of actual DataSets, this
tool allows the user greater flexibility in sharing experimental processes.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 259

XV - Document Library

By default, the lower-right Vision window is a feature known as the Document Library.

Figure 1 - The Document Library.
On Vision startup, certain folders on the C:\ drive are scanned for files of certain types. If the
files of the appropriate extensions are found, folders for them are created in the Document Li-
brary and the files are placed there. Vision first looks for *.PDF (Adobe Reader) files in
C:\DataSets\User-Printable Help and places them in a folder named "User Printable Help Files".
These files are written by the installer and represent the *.PDF format versions of these help
pages. Next files of extension *.CHM are searched in C:\Program Files\Radiant Technolo-
gies\Vision\Help and placed in the "CHM Files" folder. These are also written by the installer
and represent the compiled help pages including this main manual and the Task-specific help
pages. Finally, the path C:\DataSets\Documents is searched for a variety of document types and
these are loaded into folders per Table 1 . Many dummy examples of these files are written by
the installer to this location. The user should place any files at that location that are to be acces-
sible through Vision.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 260

File Type Extension Folder Name
Adobe Reader *.PDF PDF Files
Text *.TXT Text Files
Microsoft Word *.DOC/*.DOCX Word Files
(*.DOC/*.DOCX)
Microsoft Excel *.XLS/*.XLSX Excel Files
(*.XLS/*.XLSX)
Microsoft PowerPoint *.PPT/*.PPTX PowerPoint Files
(*.PPT/*.PPTX)
JPEG (Images) *.JPG JPEG Images
Microsoft VISIO (Drawings) *.VSD Visio Files
Bitmap Files (Images) *.BMP Bitmap Files
Web Files *.HTML HTML Files
Table 1 - Document Library File Types, Extensions and Folders.
To access any file, simply open its folder and double-click the file name/icon in the Document
Library. The file will be opened in the appropriate program provided that program is installed on
the Vision host computer.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 261

XVI - Editor Aide

Discussion
The single largest drawback in Vision is that the EDITOR is not a completely general tool for
inserting and removing Tasks. This is because of the complex dependencies between Branch and
Filter Tasks and their targets. Here are the things that can be done in the EDITOR:

• Clear the EDITOR of all Tasks.
• Append a Task or series of Tasks to existing Tasks in the EDITOR.
• Remove the last Task from the EDITOR.
• Prepend a Task or series of Tasks to the top of the Test Definition Task list in the EDI-
TOR. This is done by copying the existing Test Definition to a temporary location (Da-
taSet CTD or Customized Test), writing the Task(s) to be prepended to the EDITOR and
then restoring the original list of Tasks from the temporary location.

Here are examples of things that cannot be done in the EDITOR:

• Remove any Tasks from the interior of the Test Definition in the EDITOR. Only the last
Task may be removed. This may be done repeatedly to remove a series of Tasks, but a
Task cannot be removed that is not the last (bottom-most) Task. Tasks may be disabled
by checking No Execute. This is functionally equivalent to removing them from the Test
Definition.
• Insert any Task into the interior of the Test Definition. Tasks may only be appended or
prepended. Tasks are prepended by copying the existing Test Definition to a temporary
location (DataSet CTD or Customized Test), writing the Task(s) to be prepended to the
EDITOR and then restoring the original list of Tasks from the temporary location.
• Move a Task's position in the Test Definition up or down.

The Editor Aide tool has been added to make the construction of a Test Definition completely
general, eliminating the restrictions found in the Editor. In the Editor Aide an Editor List is con-
structed that forms the organization of a Test Definition to be moved into the Editor. Tasks may
be moved into the Editor List , in any order, from any of five categorical lists of Tasks: Hard-
ware Tasks, External Instrument Tasks, Measurement Tasks, Filter Tasks and Program Control
Tasks. The complete list of Tasks already in the Editor can also be moved into the Editor List as
a single group. Any Task in the Editor List can have a Task Name and/or Comments inde-
pendently assigned. Any Hardware/Program Task can have its programmed Max. Voltage (Field
(kV/cm) specification is not available) and/or Sample Area (cm2) and/or Sample Thickness (µm)
independently assigned within the Editor Aide. Furthermore, Tasks that are imported as a group
from the Editor window now retain all configured values

Once in the Editor List Tasks may be moved up or down in position or removed from the list. In
this way the limitations on the Editor are overcome. Once the Task sequence is established in the
Editor List Tasks may be moved back into the Editor from the Editor Aide. Tasks will be ap-
pended to any existing Tasks in the Editor Window. Tasks may be removed from the Editor

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 262

Window from within the Editor Aide, either singly, by removing the last Task in the Editor Test
Definition or as a group, but clearing all Tasks from the Editor Test Definition. As Tasks are se-
quentially moved from the Editor List to the Editor, their configuration dialog is opened for re-
view and adjustment. For Tasks that were added to the Editor List from within the Editor Aide,
only Task Name, Comments, Max. Voltage, Sample Area (cm2) and Sample Thickness (µm)
may be preset. All other Task parameters must be configured at this time. For Tasks that were
loaded into the Editor List from existing Tasks in the Editor, all configured parameters will be
retained from their original Editor configuration. However, note this caution: Filter and Branch
Tasks are associated with their Target Task(s) by the relative distance between the Fil-
ter/Branch and its Target Tasks(s). If Tasks are inserted or removed between the Fil-
ter/Branch and the Target Task(s) or if the Target Task(s) is (are) moved in position or
removed, the association(s) between the the Filter/Branch and its Target Task(s) must be
reestablished. This caution will be noted repeatedly here and below.

The current state of the Editor List may be saved to a file for future recall at any time. Note that
for all Tasks, including those whose configuration is maintained on importing from the Editor,
only Task Name, Comments, Max. Voltage, Sample Area (cm2) and Sample Thickness (µm) are
saved to file.

Accessing the Editor Aide Tool.
To access the Editor Aide, right-click in Editor Window and select "Editor Aide" from the popup

menu, or click the icon on the Vision toolbar or press <Alt-A>. The Editor Aide window
will appear as in Figure 1.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 263

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 264

Figure 1 - Accessing the Editor Aide Tool.
Inserting a Task into the Editor List
To insert a Task into the Editor List, locate and select the Task in the appropriate Task list and
then click Add Selected Task to Editor List. The Task will be appended, by Task type, to any
Tasks already in the list. Once in the List a Task may be selected in the Editor List and Task
Name and Comments may be assigned. If the Task is a Hardware/Measurement Task, Max. Volt-
age, Sample Area (cm2) and Sample Thickness (µm) may also be assigned.

Figure 2 - Inserting a Task into the Editor List.

Moving the Editor Test Definition into the Editor List
If the Editor has one or more Tasks in its Test Definition, these may be moved as a group into
the Editor List. Unlike Tasks added from within the Editor Aide tool, these Tasks will retain all
configured parameters when moved into the Editor Aide. To move the Editor Tasks into the Edi-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 265

tor List, simply click Load Editor Tasks to Editor List. All Tasks in the Editor Test Definition
will be appended, in order, to any Tasks already in the Editor List.

Figure 3 - Moving the Editor Test Definition into the Editor List.

Moving a Task Up or Down in the Editor List
To move a Task up or down in the Editor List, simply select the Task and click the up ( or
down ( ) button to swap positions with the previous or next Task. For the demonstration of
Figure 4 a Delay Task is appended to the Tasks in the Editor List and then repeatedly moved up
until it is just below the second Hysteresis Task. The Hysteresis Task is then moved down to po-
sition the Delay Task just above it.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 266

Figure 4 - Move Tasks Up and Down in the List.
Remove a Task from the Editor List
To remove a Task from the Editor List, select it in the Editor list and click Delete Selected. For
Figure 5, a second Delay Task has been added to the Editor List just after the second Hysteresis
Task. In the figure that second Delay Task is removed from the Editor List.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 267

Figure 5 - Delete the Selected Task.
The entire list of Tasks in Editor List can be deleted by clicking Clear All.

Figure 6 - Clear All Tasks from the Editor List.

Move the Editor List into the Editor
The Tasks in the Editor List can be moved, one-by-one, into the Editor by clicking Move Editor
List to Editor. The Editor List Tasks will be appended to any Tasks already in the Editor. The
Editor Task list can be adjusted, from within the Editor Aide, by Remove Last Editor Task or

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 268

Clear Editor.

Figure 7 - Remove Tasks from the Editor Test Definition.
When Move Editor List to Editor is clicked, the configuration dialog for each Task in the Editor
List is opened for review and configuration. Except for Task Name, Comments, Max Voltage,
Sample Area (cm2) and Sample Thickness (µm), which may have been established in the Editor
Aide, Task parameters for Tasks that have been inserted in the Editor Aide must be configured
before the Task dialog is closed and the Task is appended to the Test Definition in the Editor.
Tasks that were imported from the Editor into the Editor List maintain all originally-configured
values. However, Branch Tasks and Filter Tasks may have lost their connections to their respec-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 269

tive target Tasks. This is because the association is made by relative position between the
Branch/Target Tasks and their target(s). In these cases it is critical to reestablish the associations
when the Task configuration appears. In the example of the figures above, the Hysteresis-Filter
pairs associations have not been disrupted. However, inserting the Delay Task in Figure 4 has
affect the association between the Hysteresis-Filter pairs and the last two Filter Tasks as shown
in the figures below. The Critical Note on Branch and Filter Tasks button presents a message to
this effect.

Figure 8 - A Note on Branch and Filter Task Reconfiguration.
Note that this reconfiguration is especially critical if a Target Task is removed or displaced. In
the example above, if the first Hysteresis Task is removed, the first Filter Task must also be re-
moved since there is no preceding Task with which to associate it.

In Figure 9 the transfer to the Editor has been initiated by clicking Move Editor List to Editor.
The Pause Task configuration dialog appears. Pause Task Name and Comments have been previ-
ously configured in the Editor Aide. User Self-Prompt retains some persistent value from a pre-
vious configuration. It must be adjusted to match the current purposes.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 270

Figure 9 - Initiate Transfer to Editor - Configure the Pause Task.
The first Hysteresis Task configuration dialog appears next. The Task retains all configured val-
ues that it held when moved from the Editor into the Editor List. Parameters may be, but need
not be, adjusted at this time.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 271

Figure 10 - Hysteresis Task Retains all Original Parameter Values.
The first Filter Task also retains its configuration. Its association with the first Hysteresis Task is
maintained because nothing has been inserted, or deleted from, between the Tasks. The same
will be true for all three Hysteresis-Filter pairs.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 272

Figure 11 - First Collect/Plot Filter. Task Retains Proper Configura-
tion from the Editor.
The Delay Task Name and Comments were not configured in the Editor Aide. Delay Task Name
and Duration (s) are both set to default values. The Task must be completely configured to meet
the needs of the Test Definition under construction. (Note that the Delay Task is not added, here,
for practical purposes - only for demonstration.)

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 273

Figure 12 - Delay Task Configuration.
The remaining Tasks were all imported from the Editor and insertion back into the Editor pro-
ceeds as discussed above until the fourth Filter Task is to be configured. That Filter associates
with all three Hysteresis Tasks. Because the Delay Task was inserted between the first Hysteresis
Task and the Filter Task, the Filter loses its association with the first Hysteresis Task. This must
be reestablished at this configuration time. This reconfiguration is also critical for Branch Tasks.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 274

Figure 13 - Original Filter Reconfiguration.

Editor List File Storing and Recovering
The Task sequence in Editor List, along with Task Name, Comments, Max Voltage, Sample Area
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 275

(cm2) and Sample Thickness (µm), may be stored to a file, at any time, for future recovery. Note
that only the five standard parameters noted will be stored. Tasks in Editor List that were import-
ed from the Editor and retain parameters as configured in the Editor will not necessarily maintain
those parameters when stored to and recalled from the Editor List file.

The procedure consists of three button. Browse to File opens a standard Windows browser that is
used to identify the file path and file name of the Editor List file. The file will have a *.elx exten-
sion. The file may or may not exist. When the browser is closed, the file path and file name will
be displayed in the unlabeled text control immediately below Browse to File. If the file does not
exist, Save Editor List to File will be enabled. If the file does exist, Load Editor List From File
will be enabled. Clicking Save Editor List to File will cause the file to be created and all Tasks in
Editor List, along with their associated parameters, will be copied, in sequence, to the file. Since
the file now exists, Save Editor List to File will be disabled and Load Editor List From File will
be enabled. Clicking Load Editor List From File will append all Tasks in the file, in sequence, to
any Tasks already in the Editor List.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 276

Figure 14 - Storing Editor List to a File and Recovering Task from
the File.

Figure 15 shows two instances of the Collect/Plot Filter configuration from the first Hystere-
sis/Filter Pair as the Task is being moved into the Editor. In the first instance, the Task was load-
ed into Editor List from the Editor and it retains all configured values. The configuration can be
reviewed and changed if desired, but the Task is immediately ready for direct insertion into the
Editor. In the second case, the Task had been recalled from an Editor List file. retains only its
proper Collect/Plot Filter Task Name and Comments. The critical parameter of Data Type and
the Task(s) selected in Task Selector are lost and must be reestablished. Less critical, but still in-
correct, is the Plot Title. The text in this control is persistent from the most-recent configuration
of a Collect/Plot Filter Task and does not apply to the current configuration. Plot Subtitle, Plot X
Axis Label and Plot Y Axis Label are also persistent from the earlier configuration. It is coinci-
dental that these labels are correct for this configuration as well.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 277

Figure 15 - Restoring the Editor from the Editor List. Tasks Recov-
ered from a File Lose Configured Parameters.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 278

XVII - Data Mining

XVII.1 - Discussion
The Vision Data Mining tool is provided to simplify collection of data from diverse locations in
Vision to a single location for comparison. Before the introduction of Data Mining, this process
involved laboriously exporting Task data of interest either to a target outside Vision (text, Excel,
etc.) or to a Vision Data File (VDF/*.vis) from which the data could be imported back into Vi-
sion. These tools remain available, but the process has been greatly simplified by the Data Min-
ing process.

The process of Data Mining refers to the copying of any number of archived data-collecting
Tasks (Measurement Tasks or Filter Tasks) of one particular type from any number of registered
source DataSets into one Executed Test Definition (ETD) in the DataSet Archive of a single
Target DataSet. A single Filter Task, of a type appropriate to the collected Task type, may be ap-
plied to the collected data and recorded to the ETD.

Although Data Mining greatly simplifies the data collection and comparison process, the tool
still requires careful attention and pre-planning. The pre-planning involves careful identification
of the Tasks to be targeted for Data Mining including their names and the ETD and DataSet
names of their archived locations. Because of the nature of Vision execution, and as shown in the
example below, Tasks to be mined may have duplicate Task Names. The Data Mining tool will
offer an opportunity to rename the Tasks to better distinguish them. The assignment of Task
Names should be part of the preplanning process.

XVII.2 - Data Mining Wizard
The Data Mining tool is a "wizard", or serial sequence of dialogs, that configures and executes

the operation. The wizard is accessed through the Vision Toolbar icon or the DataSet-
>Data Mining menu option.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 279

Figure 1 - Initiate Data Mining.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 280

XVII.2.a - First Tab: Discussion

Figure 2 - Discussion Tab
The first dialog tab to appear is simply a discussion of the procedures and tabs that will fol-
low.

Control Type Default Discussion
Click For Dialog Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides
Instructions complete details regarding the entire Data Mining process
<Back Button Unpressed This button is disabled since there is no previous dialog tab in
the Data Mining wizard.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken
by the Data Mining tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 281

XVII.2.b - Second Tab: Select Target DataSet

Figure 3 - Select Target DataSet Data Mining Tab.
This second tab is used to identify the single DataSet that is to receive the mined data. All
registered DataSets are listed in the unlabeled Registered DataSets list. A single DataSet is
selected (highlighted) in the list. This enables the Select Target DataSet button. The Select
Target DataSet button is clicked. Three actions are then taken:

• The selected DataSet Name is coped into the unlabeled Selected DataSet text box.
• The selected DataSet is opened in the DataSet Explorer if it was not previously
opened.
• The Next > button is enabled.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 282

Figure 4 - Select Existing Target DataSet.
Before clicking Next > a new DataSet may be selected and registered as the target using the
Select Target DataSet button. This repeats the three actions above. In addition, the first se-
lected DataSet will be closed if it was previously opened. The process may be repeated until
the correct target DataSet is selected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 283

Figure 5 - Reselect an Existing Target DataSet.
A new DataSet may also be created from within the Target DataSet Selection tab and as-
signed as the target. Clicking the New DataSet button initiates the New DataSet process.
When the New DataSet dialog is closed the DataSet is created and opened, the DataSet name
is added to the unlabeled Selected DataSet control, the DataSet is added to the unlabeled
Registered DataSet list control and the Next > button is enabled. The process automatically
selects the new DataSet as the target DataSet. However, once the new DataSet is created, the
selection may be changed to any registered DataSet .

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 284

Figure 6 - Create a New Target DataSet.
Control Type Default Discussion
Registered List No This control lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. A single Da-
DataSets Box Selection taSet is selected (highlighted) in this list to identify it as the Target DataSet
(Unlabeled) selection. This control initially has no DataSet selected. Selecting a DataSet
enables Select Target DataSet. This list may be augmented by in inserting a
new DataSet, alphabetically, using the New DataSet button. After the list is
augmented, the new DataSet will be selected (highlighted).
Select Button Unpressed This control is disabled until a single DataSet is selected in Registered Da-
Target taSets. Clicking this button registers the DataSet selected in Registered Da-
DataSet taSets as the target DataSet and:

• Copies the DataSet name into the unlabeled Selected DataSet text
control.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 285

• Opens the selected DataSet in the DataSet Explorer if it was not pre-
viously opened.
• Closes any DataSet that was opened by the button, but was previously
closed.
• Enables the Next > button.

This button may remain disabled if the DataSet selected in Registered Da-
taSets was created using the New DataSet button.
Selected Text "" This control is initially empty of text. It is updated to show the target Da-
DataSet taSet name by either the Select Target DataSet or New DataSet button.
(Unlabeled)
New Button Unpressed Initiate the creation of a new target DataSet as shown in Figure 6 and the
DataSet discussion above the figure.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete de-
Dialog tails regarding the entire Data Mining process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Discussion)
tab.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is disa-
bled until Select Target DataSet is clicked or a new DataSet is created.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the Data
Mining tool.

XVII.2.c - Third Tab: Select Source DataSet(s)

Figure 7 - Select Source DataSets Tab.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 286

The third Data Mining wizard tab also lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. Here,
one or more DataSets are selected to provide the archived Tasks whose data are to be mined.
Note that the user should carefully identify all DataSets of interest before executing the Data
Mining wizard. Note that there is no restriction to the number or identity of the DataSets to
be selected. This extends to the target DataSet that may also serve as a data source. Select the
intended source DataSets and then click Select Source DataSets. Two things will occur:

• The unlabeled Source DataSet(s) text control will show a list of the selected source
DataSets.
• The Next > button will be enabled.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 287

Figure 8 - Select Source DataSets.
The selection may be adjusted at any time by deselecting unintended DataSets, selecting the
intended one and clicking Select Source DataSets again.

Figure 9 - Adjust Source DataSet Selection.
Control Type Default Discussion
Registered List No This control lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. One or more
DataSets Box Selection DataSet(s) is/are selected (highlighted) in this list to identify the data source
(Unlabeled) DataSet selection. This control initially has no DataSet selected. Selecting
any DataSet(s) enables Select Source DataSet(s).
Select Button Unpressed This control is disabled until a single DataSet is selected in Registered Da-
Source taSets. Clicking this button registers the DataSet(s) selected in Registered
DataSet(s) DataSets as the source DataSet(s) and:

• Copies the DataSet name, or list of names, into the unlabeled Selected
DataSet text control.
• Enables the Next > button.
Selected Text "" This control is initially empty of text. It is updated to show the target Da-
DataSet taSet name by either the Select Target DataSet or New DataSet button.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 288

(Unlabeled)
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete de-
Dialog In- tails regarding the entire Data Mining process
structions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select Target
DataSet) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining. The
results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is disa-
bled until Select Source DataSet(s) is clicked.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the Data
Mining tool.

XVII.2.d - Fourth Tab: Select Task Type

Figure 10 - Task Type Selection Dialog.
When Next > is clicked on the Select Source DataSet(s) tab, two things happen:

• Selected DataSets are opened if they were not previously opened.
• The selected DataSet are searched for instances of Task types that contain data that
can be mined. This will include Measurement Tasks and Filter Tasks.

Note that this process may take considerable time depending on the number and size of the
source DataSets. The fourth Data Mining wizard tab then displays a list of those data-
producing Task types that were found in the source DataSets. The user must select a single
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 289

Task type. Clicking Select Task Type then enables the Next > button. The selection may be
changed, perhaps repeatedly, before proceeding to the next wizard tab.

Figure 11 - Select the Hysteresis Task Type.
Control Type Default Discussion
Available List No Selection This control lists all Tasks types in the source DataSet(s) that may be
Task Types Box mined for data. A single Task Type is to be selected for mining. This
(Unlabeled) control initially has no Task type selected.
Select Task Button Unpressed Clicking this button registers the Task Type selected in Available Task
Type Types as the type to mine. It enables the Next > button.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire Data Mining process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select
Source DataSet(s)) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in
Data Mining. The results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is
disabled until Select Task Type is clicked.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the
Data Mining tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 290

XVII.2.e - Fifth Tab: Select Tasks

Figure 12 - Select Tasks Tab.
When Next > is clicked in the Select Task Type tab the source DataSet(s) is/are searched
again. This time every instance of the selected Task type is identified in the DataSet(s). Once
again this may take considerable time, depending on the number and size of source Da-
taSet(s). The identified Tasks are then listed in the unlabeled Select Task(s) list box. The
Tasks are organized into a three-level tree. The outer-most level shows the source DataSet(s),
by DataSet Name. Under each DataSet is a list, by ETD (Executed Test Definition) Name, of
all ETDs that contain instances of the selected Task type. Under each ETD are the individual
Tasks of the selected Task type. From this list the user selects any subset of the available
Tasks. Tasks may be individually selected or all Tasks in an ETD may be selected by check-
ing the ETD. All Tasks in a DataSet may also be selected by checking the DataSet. Once the
subset of Tasks is properly selected, clicking Select Tasks registers the Task for mining and
enables Next >.

Note that the procedures in this wizard tab require careful preplanning to identify the intend-
ed Tasks and their locations.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 291

Figure 13 - Select Tasks by Task and/or ETD and/or DataSet.

Control Type Default Discussion
Select List No This control lists all Tasks of the selected type in the source DataSets. Tasks
Task(s) Box Selection are listed in the DataSet by DataSet Name->ETD Name->Task Name. Any
(Unlabeled) subset of the available Tasks ia to be selected for mining. Tasks may be
selected individually, by all Tasks in an ETD or all Tasks in a DataSet.
Select Tasks Button Unpressed Clicking this button registers the Tasks selected in Available Task Types as
the type to mine. It enables the Next > button.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete de-
Dialog tails regarding the entire Data Mining process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select Task
Type) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining. The

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 292

results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is disa-
bled until Select Tasks is clicked.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the Data
Mining tool.

XVII.2.f - Sixth Tab: Rename Tasks

Figure 14 - Rename Tasks Tab.
As shown in Figure 13, by the nature of Vision, Tasks of the same name may be repeatedly
executed and stored to the DataSet. This is particularly true if the Task is operating in a
Branch Loop. This next wizard tab allows the user to adjust the names of Tasks before Data
Mining to render them more descriptive and, especially, unique. Each of the selected Tasks is
listed, by DataSet Name->ETD Name->Task Name in the unlabeled Selected Task list box.
Select each Task in the list whose name is to be updated. The Task Name will be copied to
the New Task Name control. Edit the name in the control. As the name is edited, the Task
Name in the list is updated. As noted on the New Task Name control, the Task Name length
is limited to 30 characters for older target DataSets. Otherwise the limit is 60 characters. It is
up to the user to enforce the 30-character limit.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 293

Figure 15 - Rename the First Selected Task.

Control Type Default Discussion
New Task Text "" 30 characters maximum for target DataSets created in Vision versions old-
Name er than 5.5.0. 60 characters maximum for newer target DataSets. When a
Task is selected in the unlabeled Selected Tasks list, the Task Name is du-
plicated in this control. The name can then be edited to make it more
meaningful and, especially, unique. As the name is adjusted in New Task
Name it is also adjusted in Selected Tasks.
Selected List No This control lists all Tasks that are selected for Data Mining. Tasks are
Tasks (Un- Box Selection listed by DataSet Name->ETD Name->Task Name. Selecting a Task du-
labeled) plicates it Task Name in the New Task Name control. Editing the name in
New Task Name adjusts the Task Name in this list as it is edited.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire Data Mining process

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 294

Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select
Tasks) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining. The
results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the Da-
ta Mining tool.

XVII.2.g - Seventh Tab: Select a Filter to Apply

Figure 16 - Filter Tasks that Can Task Hysteresis Data as Input.
The next tab lists all Filter Tasks that can take the selected Task Type as input. At the top of
the list is "<<None>>". That is selected by default. With "<<None>>" selected no Filter will
be applied to the mined data. Otherwise the Filter of the selected type will be applied. To se-
lect a Filter choose the Filter option (or "<<None>>") in Select 1 Filter or "<<None>>" and
then click Select a Filter. This registers the selected Filter type for use and enables the Next
> button.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 295

Figure 17 - Select the Hysteresis Filter Task.
Control Type Default Discussion
Select 1 Filter Text "<<None>>" This list box shows a Filter Tasks that can be associated with the select-
or ed Task Type. The top of the list is "<<None>>". One entry from the
"<<None>>" list may be selected. Selecting "<<None>>" disables the appending of a
Filter Task. Otherwise the Filter selected is registered by clicking Select
a Filter.
Select a Filter Button Unpressed This button registers the selection in Select 1 Filter or "<<None>>"
and enables Next >.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire Data Mining process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Rename
Tasks) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining.
The results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 296

disabled until Select a Filter is clicked.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the
Data Mining tool.

XVII.2.h - Eighth Tab: Assign a CTD/ETD Name

Figure 18 - CTD/ETD Naming Tab.
The mined Tasks will be appended to the target DataSet Archive in a new Executed Test
Definition (ETD). Test Definitions are recorded in the DataSet Archive by name. The final
tab allows the user to specify the name under which the data will be archived. It is important
to assign a unique and meaningful name so that future data reviews can identify the data.
Once characters are entered into Enter and Executed Test Definition Name, Finish will be
enabled.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 297

Figure 19 - Assign the CTD/ETD Name.
Control Type Default Discussion
Enter an Text "" Enter the name underwhich all Data-Mined data will be archived. This
Executed value has a 30-character limit if the target DataSet was created under a
Test Vision version older than 5.5.0. Otherwise the limit is 60 characters. Enter-
Definition ing text in this control enables Finish.
(ETD) Name
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire Data Mining process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select a
Filter) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining. The
results may or may not be as expected.
Finish Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard and initiates the Data Mining
process. This control is disabled until text is entered into Enter an Execut-
ed Test Definition (ETD) Name.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the Data Mining wizard with no action taken by the Da-
ta Mining tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 298

XVI.3 - Configure the Filter Task

Figure 20 - Hysteresis Filter Task Configuration Dialog.
If the mined data are to have a Filter appended to collect the data, the Filter Task is not being
mined from the source DataSets. Instead this is a new Filter that must be configured and execut-
ed. The configuration opens when the Data Mining wizard is closed. (If no Filter Task was se-
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 299

lected, then no configuration dialog will appear and the process moves to XVI.4) THE USER
MUST ENSURE THAT THE FILTER TASK IS CORRECTLY AND COMPLETELY
CONFIGURED OR THE DATA MINING PROCEDURE WILL FAIL. Once the Filter
Task is correctly configured, click OK to close the Filter configuration dialog and finish the Data
Mining process.

Figure 21 - Configure the Main Hysteresis Filter Tab.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 300

Figure 22 - Configure the Hysteresis Plot Tab.
XVI.4 - Data-Mined Data
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 301

Figure 23 - Hysteresis Filter Applied to Data-Mined Data. These are
Measurements Taken on the 1.0 nF Linear Internal Reference Ca-
pacitor.
If a Filter Task is applied to the data and if the Filter is configured to plot data on execution, the
Filter plot will appear with the collected (and, perhaps, manipulated) data. In the example of
Figure 23, fewer Tasks were mined for data than shown in Figures 13 and 14. These represent
actual Hysteresis measurements taken on the Precision tester's 1.0 nF linear Internal Reference
Capacitor.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 302

Figure 24 - Target DataSet with Mined Data Plus Appended Hyste-
resis Filter Task.
The target DataSet is updated with a new Executed Test Definition (ETD) appended. The EDT
takes on the name as assigned in Figure 19. The first entry under the "Experiment Data" folder is
a General Information Task that is added to any Test Definition execution automatically by Vi-
sion. It contains details of the configuration of each Task in the Test Definition. In the case of
Data-Mined Tasks it gives only the Task Name, represented by Source DataSet Name->ETD
Name->Task Name.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 303

Figure 25 - Automatic General Information Task.
The Automatic General Information Task is followed by a cloned copy of each of the mined
Tasks. Task configuration and measured data are accessible, as in and DataSet Archive, by dou-
ble-clicking.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 304

Figure 26 - Review Mined Data.
Finally, the appended Hysteresis Task appears as the last Task in the ETD. It can also be recalled
for review.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 305

Figure 27 - Review the Appended Filter Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 306

XVIII - ETD Transfer

XVIII.1 - Discussion

The ETD Transfer tool is similar in configuration and intent to the Data Mining tool. In the Data
Mining tool any number of Tasks of a specific type is cloned from the archives of any number of
DataSets to a single Executed Test Definition (ETD) in the DataSet Archive of a single target
DataSet. In addition a single Filter Task may be applied to collect and, perhaps, operate on the
data from the mined Tasks. The ETD Transfer tool, on the other hand, copies all Tasks, of any
type, from any number of ETDs in any number of DataSet Archives to an equivalent number of
ETDs in the DataSet Archive of a single target DataSet.

As with the Data Mining tool, the ETD Transfer tool is configured using a wizard.

XVII.2 - ETD Transfer Wizard
The ETD Transfer tool is a "wizard", or serial sequence of dialogs, that configures and executes

the operation. The wizard is accessed through the Vision Toolbar icon or the DataSet-
>ETD Transfer menu option.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 307

Figure 1 - Access the ETD Transfer Tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 308

XVIII.2.a - First Tab: Discussion

Figure 2 - Discussion Tab
The first dialog tab to appear is simply a discussion of the procedures and tabs that will fol-
low.

Control Type Default Discussion
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides com-
Dialog plete details regarding the entire ETD Transfer process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is disabled since there is no previous dialog tab in the
ETD Transfer wizard.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the ETD Transfer wizard with no action taken
by the ETD Transfer tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 309

XVIII.2.b - Second Tab: Select Target DataSet

Figure 3 - Select Target DataSet ETD Transfer Tab.
This second tab is used to identify the single DataSet that is to receive the mined data. All
registered DataSets are listed in the unlabeled Registered DataSets list. A single DataSet is
selected (highlighted) in the list. This enables the Select Target DataSet button. The Select
Target DataSet button is clicked. Two actions are then taken:

• The selected DataSet is opened in the DataSet Explorer if it was not previously
opened.
• The Next > button is enabled.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 310

Figure 4 - Select Existing Target DataSet.
Before clicking Next > a new DataSet may be selected and registered as the target using the
Select Target DataSet button. This repeats the two actions above. In addition, the first select-
ed DataSet will be closed if it was previously opened. The process may be repeated until the
correct target DataSet is selected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 311

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 312

Figure 6 - Create a New Target DataSet.
Control Type Default Discussion
Registered List No This control lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. A single Da-
DataSets Box Selection taSet is selected (highlighted) in this list to identify it as the Target DataSet
(Unlabeled) selection. This control initially has no DataSet selected. Selecting a Da-
taSet enables Select Target DataSet. This list may be augmented by in in-
serting a new DataSet, alphabetically, using the New DataSet button. After
the list is augmented, the new DataSet will be selected (highlighted).
Select Tar- Button Unpressed This control is disabled until a single DataSet is selected in Registered Da-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 313

get DataSet taSets. Clicking this button registers the DataSet selected in Registered
DataSets as the target DataSet and:

• Opens the selected DataSet in the DataSet Explorer if it was not pre-
viously opened.
• Closes any DataSet that was opened by the button, but was previous-
ly closed.
• Enables the Next > button.

This button may remain disabled if the DataSet selected in Registered Da-
taSets was created using the New DataSet button.
New Button Unpressed Initiate the creation of a new target DataSet as shown in Figure 6 and the
DataSet discussion above the figure.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire ETD Transfer process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Discussion)
tab.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is dis-
abled until Select Target DataSet is clicked or a new DataSet is created.
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the ETD Transfer wizard with no action taken by the
ETD Transfer tool.

XVIII.2.c - Third Tab: Select Source DataSet(s)

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 314

The third ETD Transfer wizard tab also lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. Here,
one or more DataSets are selected to provide the archived Tasks whose data are to be mined.
Note that the user should carefully identify all DataSets of interest before executing the ETD
Transfer wizard. Note that there is no restriction to the number or identity of the DataSets to
be selected. This extends to the target DataSet that may also serve as a data source. Select the
intended source DataSets and then click Select Source DataSets. The Next > button will be
enabled.

Figure 8 - Select Source DataSets.
The selection may be adjusted at any time by deselecting unintended DataSets, selecting the
intended one and clicking Select Source DataSets again.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 315

Figure 9 - Adjust Source DataSet Selection.
Control Type Default Discussion
Registered List Box No Selection This control lists all DataSets currently registered to Vision. One or
DataSets more DataSet(s) is/are selected (highlighted) in this list to identify the
(Unlabeled) data source DataSet selection. This control initially has no DataSet se-
lected. Selecting any DataSet(s) enables Select Source DataSet(s).
Select Button Unpressed This control is disabled until a single DataSet is selected in Registered
Source DataSets. Clicking this button registers the DataSet(s) selected in Regis-
DataSet(s) tered DataSets as the source DataSet(s) and Enables the Next > button.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete
Dialog details regarding the entire ETD Transfer process
Instructions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select
Target DataSet) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data
Mining. The results may or may not be as expected.
Next > Button Unpressed This button advances the wizard to the next dialog tab. This control is
disabled until Select Source DataSet(s).
Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the ETD Transfer wizard with no action taken by the
ETD Transfer tool.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 316

XVIII.2.d - Fourth Tab: Select ETDs to Transfer

Figure 10 - Select ETDs to Transfer Tab.
When the Next > button is clicked on the Source DataSet Selection tab, the selected DataSets
are opened and searched for all archived Executed Test Definitions (ETDs). The fourth ETD
Transfer wizard tab lists the selected DataSets in a tree structure in a list box. Under each Da-
taSet entry each ETD archived in the DataSet is listed by name. Individual ETDs can be se-
lected for transfer by checking them under the DataSets. All ETDs in a DataSet can also be
selected for transfer by checking the DataSet in the tree. With the collection of ETDs to be
transferred selected, clicking Select ETD(S) will register the selected ETDs for transfer and
enable the Finish button.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 317

Figure 11 - Select ETDs to Transfer.
Control Type Default Discussion
ETDs List No This control lists all selected source DataSets in a tree control. Expanding the
(Unlabeled) Box Selection DataSets entries shows all Executed Test Definitions (ETDs) archived in the
DataSets. Individual ETDs can be selected for transfer by checking them in
the tree. All ETDs under any DataSet can be selected by checking the Da-
taSet.
Select Button Unpressed This control is disabled until at least one ETD is selected for transfer. Click
ETD(s) this button registers all ETDs selected in the tree for transfer. It enables the
Finish button.
Click For Button Unpressed This button opens a Dialog Instructions project that provides complete details
Dialog In- regarding the entire ETD Transfer process
structions
<Back Button Unpressed This button is will move the wizard backward to the previous (Select Source
DataSet) tab. Note that this action is not well-supported in Data Mining. The
results may or may not be as expected.
Finish Button Unpressed This button closes the wizard and initiates the ETD Transfer. This control is
disabled until Select ETD(s) is clicked.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 318

Cancel Button Unpressed This button closes the ETD Transfer wizard with no action taken by the ETD
Transfer tool.

XVIII.3- ETD Transfer

When the ETD Transfer Wizard is closed with the Finish button, the transfer is initiated. Vision
will show rapid activity until all ETDs are transferred. When finished, the Target DataSet will
have each of the selected ETDs appended to its DataSet Archive.

Figure 12 - Results of the ETD Transfer.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 319

XIX - Simple Measurement

Simple Measure Tool
User guide
2020

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 320

Discussion

The Simple Measure option is introduced to Vision in version 5.12.0. .This option allows basic
low-voltage Hysteresis measurements to be quickly configured, executed and stored, as a Task,
to an Executed Test Definition (ETD) in a DataSet. The configuration and execution are inde-
pendent of any other Tasks in Vision, so the process can be initiated immediately without access-
ing a Task in QuikLook or configuring a Test Definition in the Editor.

Any number of Hysteresis measurements may be made and stored to the DataSet. Configuration
parameters may be changed and new measurements may be appended to existing data. Or data
may be cleared between measurements. The user has a limited number of parameters to config-
ure, including:

1. Task Name: (60 characters maximum). Since the Simple Measure data are stored to the
DataSet a standard Task Name must be provided under which the data will be stored.

2. Volts: (±500.0) The voltage to be applied to the sample during the Hysteresis measure-
ment. This is limited to the capability of the tester's internal amplifier and depends on the
model purchase. Limits of ±10.0 Volts, ±30.0 Volts, ±100.0 Volts, ±200.0 Volts or
±500.0 Volts may apply.

3. Period (ms): (0.0002 to 30,000.0 ms) The duration, in milliseconds, of the Hysteresis
measurement. This is equivalent to 1000.0 / Frequency (Hz). The actual limits will de-
pend on the tester model being used.

4. Area (cm2): (Strictly greater than 0.0) This is the area (cm2) of the smallest sample elec-
trode connected to the Precision tester DRIVE or RETURN port. (Note that, if the elec-
trodes are not the same area, DRIVE is normally connected to the larger electrode. For
example, if an array of capacitors on a wafer have a common bottom electrode, DRIVE
should be connected to the bottom electrode. Theoretical discussion of the reasons for the
are beyond the scope of this document.) The tester captures charge that is moving onto or
off of the sample RETURN electrode as the result of the application of the DRIVE volt-
age. However, Vision reports the data in units of Polarization. Polarization is given as
Charge (µC)/Area (cm2). Area (cm2) must be correctly entered to produce accurate data.

5. Thickness (µm): (Strictly greater than 0.0) This is the third dimension in the sample ge-
ometry. It is the distance through the ferroelectric material, between sample electrodes.
This value is recorded simply for complete documentation of the measurement.

6. Preset: As in a standard Hysteresis Task, with this option checked and unmeasured
DRIVE profile voltage will be applied to the sample. This is to preset the sample into a
polarization state opposite the state that will be switched by the application of Volts . This
ensures that the polarization is switching throughout the bipolar measurement. With this
option unchecked, the polariation behavior of the first half of the measurement will de-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 321

pend on the state of the sample before the Simple Measure process is initiated. When this
control is checked, Preset Delay (ms) will be enabled.

7. Preset Delay (ms): when Preset is checked, this control is used to specify the delay be-
tween the application of the unmeasured Preset DRIVE voltage waveform and the meas-
urement waveform. Sufficent delay should be applied to allow any charge movement in
the sample that results from the preset waveform to settle so that the measurement begins
in a quiescent state.

To maintain simplicity, a large number of options available to the standard Hysteresis measure-
ment are predetermined for the Simple Measure process and are not under user control. Some of
the more important options that are fixed include:

1. DRIVE profile is standard bipolar triangular.

2. High-voltage measurements are not available.

3. Auto Amp and User Last Amp Value are enabled.

4. Internal reference elements are not available.

The process is initiated by clicking the button on the Vision toolbar or by selecting the Da-
taSet->Simple Measurement Vision menu option.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 322

Figure 1 - Access the Simple Meaure Process.
A new target DataSet may be created during the DataSet selection process.

For a complete discussion of the Simple Measure process, see the Simple Measeure Operation
page.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 323

Operation

Initiate the Simple Measure Process

To initiate the Simple Measure Process, click the button on the Vision toolbar or select the
DataSet->Simple Measurement Vision menu option.

Figure 1 - Access the Simple Measure process.
Select a Target DataSet
The first step is to select the target DataSet. A DataSet selection dialog appears, similar to the
dialog in Data Mining. Because this process uses a "Pseudo" Task called Simple Measure, inter-
nal complexities require that an existing DataSet, with a Current Test Definition (CTD ) that is
not empty, be selected as the target. As a result, when a new DataSet is created, either from with-
in the DataSet Selection dialog or before the Simple Measure process, a General Information
Task is now configured and inserted into the DataSet as the CTD.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 324

Figure 2 - DataSet Selection Dialog - No DataSet Selected.
The dialog will appear as in Figure 2 . All registered DataSets are listed. Select Target DataSet
and OK are disabled. Select Target DataSet is enabled once a DataSet is selected. A new DataSet
may be created from this dialog. The DataSet will be selected once it is created and Set Target
DataSet will be enabled.

Figure 3 - DataSet Selection Dialog - A DataSet is Selected.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 325

Figure 4 - DataSet Selection Dialog - New DataSet Process.
Clicking Select Target DataSet will open the selected DataSet if it is closed. It also enables the
OK button.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 326

Figure 5 - DataSet Selection Dialog - Select Target DataSet is
Clicked.
Configure the Measurement
If Cancel is clicked in the DataSet Selection Dialog, the Simple Measure process is terminated,
but the target DataSet remains open. Clicking OK closes the DataSet selection dialog and opens
the Simple Measure Control dialog.

Figure 6 - Simple Measure Control Dialog - Measurement is not
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 327

Configured.
Initially, only Configure , Click For Dialog Instructions and Done are enabled in the simple dia-
log. Click for Dialog Instructions opens this help project. Done terminates the project. Configure
opens the basic Configuration dialog.

Figure 7 - Simple Measure Control Dialog - Measurement is not
Configured.
The dialog is used to set:

1. Task Name: (60 characters maximum). Since the Simple Measure data are stored to the
DataSet a standard Task Name must be provided under which the data will be stored.

2. Volts: (±500.0) The voltage to be applied to the sample during the Hysteresis measure-
ment. This is limited to the capability of the tester's internal amplifier and depends on the
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 328

model purchase. Limits of ±10.0 Volts, ±30.0 Volts, ±100.0 Volts, ±200.0 Volts or
±500.0 Volts may apply.

6. Preset: As in a standard Hysteresis Task, with this option checked and unmeasured
DRIVE profile voltage will be applied to the sample. This is to preset the sample into a
polarization state opposite the state that will be switched by the application of Volts . This
ensures that the polarization is switching throughout the bipolar measurement. With this
option unchecked, the polarization behavior of the first half of the measurement will de-
pend on the state of the sample before the Simple Measure process is initiated. When this
control is checked, Preset Delay (ms) will be enabled.

7. Preset Delay (ms): When Preset is checked, this control is used to specify the delay be-
tween the application of the unmeasured Preset DRIVE voltage waveform and the meas-
urement waveform. Sufficient delay should be applied to allow any charge movement in
the sample that results from the preset waveform to settle so that the measurement begins
in a quiescent state.

Note that Task Name must not be empty or the dialog will not exit.

Once the Simple Measure is configured and the Configuration Dialog is closed, the Main Control
Dialog will have Measure enabled.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 329

Figure 8 - Simple Measure Control Dialog - Measurement is Con-
figured and Measure is Enabled.
Measurement
Clicking Measure opens the Measurement Dialog.

Figure 9 - Measurement Dialog - No Data Have Been Taken.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 330

The dialog consists of a central plotting area, a series of list boxes that show configuration pa-
rameters and extracted measured values for each of the plotted measurements, a Measure button
that will initiate a new measurement and a Clear Data button that deletes all measured data. In
Figure 9 , no data have yet been collect. There is no plot, the list boxes are empty and Clear Da-
ta is disabled. Clicking Measure causes the the Hysteresis measurement to begin. Once it has
completed, the data are plotted, the various list boxes have an appended entry and Clear Data is
enabled.

Figure 10 - Measurement Dialog - Single Data Plot.
The measurement may be repeated any number of times.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 331

Figure 11 - Measurement Dialog - Multiple Data Plot.
Measured data may be clieared and retaken Note that Clear Data will not remove the displayed
data or clear the list boxes. However, the new measurement will overwrite the displayed data and
parameters in the lists.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 332

Figure 12 - Measurement Dialog - Cleared and Remeasured Data.
Cancel will close the dialog and return the the Main Control Dialog with no further action. Any
captured data and parameter vectors are permanently lost. However, if the dialog is closed with
OK , the measured data an parameter lists are retained when the control is returned to the Main
Control Dialog. In this case, before returning to the Main Control Dialog, the user is prompted to
adjust the CTD/ETD name with the standard text control. It is important to enter a unique and
meaningful name.

Figure 13 - Provide a Unique and Meaningful CTD Name.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 333

When the CTD/ETD Name Dialog is closed, the DataSet will be updated with the measured data
and data lists written to the DataSet Archive. Clear Data is enabled in the Main Dialog Control.
Data can be removed from the Simple Measure project using Clear Data. The data are perma-
nently saved to the DataSet Archive. If Clear Data is clicked, Clear Data is disabled.

Figure 14 - Main Control with Data in Memory. Updated DataSet.
If Clear Data is not clicked, the measured data and parameter lists remain in memory. A new
measurement may be configured and appended to existing data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 334

Figure 15 - Measure Under a New Configuration.
When the Measurement Dialog is closed, the data will again be saved to the DataSet Archive
with a new CTD/ETD Name, if desired.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 335

Figure 16 - Second Archive Update.
Recover Archived Data
When the dialog is closed, the DataSet is also closed. To review data, reopen the DataSet, open
the DataSet Archive, open the Desired ETD and double-click the Simple Measure "Task", just as
you would any Task in a DataSet. Note that the original General Information Task (or any previ-
ous Test Definition) has been restored to the CTD under the original CTD name.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 336

Figure 17 - Data Recovery Process.
The archived data will reappear in the Measurement Dialog. Clear Data and Measure are disa-
bled.

Figure 18 - Recovered Archived Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 337

Export Data
Since the intention of this process is to provde a direct measurement tool that is kept as simple as
possible, the discussion above provides the complete extent of the tool. There are no further fea-
tures available. For example, the Exporting tool that is common to all Tasks is absent. However,
since the data are plotted, the plotting library does provide a number of automatic actions, in-
cluding an export tool. Although for most Measurement Tasks and Filters the use of this tool is
discouraged in favor of the Vision export option, in this case the plotted data can be exported
even without such a tool.

To export data, right-click in the plot surface. A popup menu will appear. Investigate the various
options available from the menu. Then select Export Dialog... Several of the options allow you
export directly to image files. You may also export - point-by-point - the data vectors that form
the image. These may be exported to a text file or to the clipboard.

Figure 19 - Configure Data Exporting.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 338

Best results are achieved when the export is to a text file that can be imported into Microsoft Ex-
cel. Once the file is identified, click Export to configure the output. For best results select:

1. All Data
2. Data
3. Table
4. Points/Subsets
5. Maximum Precision

The resulting output file is shown in Figure 20 .

Figure 20 - Exported Text File.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 339

Select Target DataSet

Task Name: Simple Measure
Version: 5.12.0
Last Task Update: 5 December 2016
In QuikLook Menu: No
Folder: None
Subfolder: None
Subsubfolder: None
Window Name: Simple Measurement - Select Target DataSet
Known Bugs: None
User Variables Added: None

Dialog

Figure 1 - Access the Simple Measure Project.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 340

Figure 2 - Initial Target DataSet Selection Dialog.

Figure 3 - DataSet List Selection is Made.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 341

Figure 4 - Target DataSet Selection is Validated.

Figure 5 - Target DataSet is Opened.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 342

New DataSet

Figure 6 - Initiate a New DataSet.

Figure 7 - Standard New DataSet Dialog.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 343

Figure 8 - Process is Updated with the New DataSet.

Figure 9 - The New DataSet is Selected.
Discussion
The Simple Measurement - Select Target DataSet dialog opens, as the first dialog in the Simple

Measure process, when is clicked on the Vision toolbar. The dialog's primary control is an

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 344

unlabeled DataSets list box. The box lists, by DataSet name, all DataSets that are currently regis-
tered to Vision. Initially no selection is made in the control. (No DataSet is highlighted.) The
controls Select Target DataSet and OK are disabled. A single DataSet should be selected in the
list. Highlighting a DataSet name in the list enabled Select Target DataSet. Clicking Select Tar-
get DataSet validates the target selection by opening the DataSet (if it is initially closed), writing
the DataSet name to the unlabeled Selected DataSet Name control and enabling OK. The DataSet
selection can be changed any number of times. However, each time a new selection is made, the
DataSet will be opened (if it is not already) without closing the previously-selected DataSet.

A new DataSet may be created from within the Target DataSet Selection Dialog. Clicking New
DataSet opens a standard New DataSet dialog. The dialog is used to create and open the DataSet.
In this process the new DataSet is added to the DataSet list box and highlighted. However, the
DataSet selection is not yet validated. Select Target DataSet is enabled if it was not previously
enabled. Clicking Select Target DataSet validates the selection. OK is enabled if it was not pre-
viously enabled.

Clicking OK, closes the dialog and opens the Main Control Dialog. Clicking Cancel closes the
dialog and returns Vision to the idle state. Any DataSets opened during the process will remain
open.

Controls
Name Type Default Discussion
DataSets List No This list box lists every DataSet that is currently registered to Vision. Ini-
(Unlabeled) Box Selection tially no selection is made in the list. (No entry is highlighted.) With no
selection made Select Target DataSet is disabled. A single selection must
be made by left-clicking on the intended DataSet. This highlights the selec-
tion and enables Select Target DataSet. If a new DataSet is created by using
the New DataSet control, the DataSet name will be added to the list and
highlighted. Select Target DataSet will be enabled.
Select Tar- Button Unpressed This control is initially disabled. It is enabled when a single selection is
get DataSet made in the unlabeled DataSets list box. The selection is made either by
left-clicking an existing entry in the list box or by creating a new DataSet
using the New DataSet button. Clicking this button registers the DataSet
selected in DataSets as the target DataSet. It opens the selected DataSet if it
was initially closed. It writes the DataSet name to the unlabeled Target Da-
taSet Name control and enables OK. Selections can be changed any number
of times. Each time a selection is made the DataSet will be opened if it was
initially closed. All opened DataSets will remain open once the dialog is
closed.
Target Da- Text "" This control is read-only. It contains the name of the target DataSet and is
taSet Name updated by clicking Select Target DataSet.
(Unlabeled)
New Da- Button Unpressed Clicking this button opens a standard New DataSet Dialog. The dialog is
taSet used to create a new DataSet that is opened and whose name is added to the
DataSets list. The DataSet is also selected (highlighted) in the DataSets List
and Select Target DataSet is enabled.
Click for Button Unpressed Clicking this button opens this help project.
Dialog In-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 345

structions
OK Button Unpressed This control is initially disabled. It is enabled when a DataSet is selected in
the DataSets list and Select Target DataSet is clicked. Clicking this button
closes the dialog and opens the Main Control Dialog. Any DataSets opened
during the operation of this dialog will remain opened.
Cancel Button Unpressed Clicking this button closes the dialog and terminates the Simple Measure
process. Any DataSets opened during the operation of this dialog will re-
main opened.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 346

Main Dialog Control

Task Name: Simple Measure
Version: 5.12.1
Last Task Update: 5 December 2016
In QuikLook Menu: No
Folder: None
Subfolder: None
Subsubfolder: None
Window Name: Simple Measure Main Control
Known Bugs: None

Dialog

Figure 1 - Main Control Dialog - Initial - Not Configured/No Data.

Figure 2 - Main Control Dialog - After Configuration.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 347

Figure 3 - Main Control Dialog - Measurement is Made and Data
are Available.

Figure 4 - Main Control Dialog - Clear Data from Memory.
Discussion
This very simple dialog is the main operation dialog in the Simple Measure process. It is opened
after a target DataSet has been selected. The dialog either passes program operation to subdia-
logs or performs basic functions. On initial startup, dialog actions are limited to configuring a
measurement, reading these Dialog Instructions or exiting the process. To those ends, Configure,
Click for Dialog Instructions and Done are enabled. Clear Data and Measure are disabled (Fig-
ure 1). The configuration of a measurement is done by opening Configuration Dialog using the
Configure button. When the configuration is done and the Configuration Dialog is closed, pro-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 348

gram operation returns to the Main Dialog. With the measurement configured, Measure is ena-
bled (Figure 2). Clicking Measure opens the Measure Dialog. In that dialog one or more meas-
urements may be made using the current measurement configuration. When the Measure Dialog
is closed, the data are written to the selected DataSet Archive and program execution returns to
the Main Control dialog. Since data are recorded in memory, Clear Data is enabled (Figure 3)
Clicking Clear Data removes the data from memory and disables Clear Data.

Controls
Name Type Default Discussion
Configure Button Unpressed This button is always enabled. Clicking this button opens the Configuration
Dialog. In that dialog Task Name must be assigned and measurements pa-
rameters may be adjusted. This dialog may be accessed at any time from the
Main Dialog. The configuration may be changed whether or not there are
data in program memory. Closing the Configuration Dialog returns execu-
tion to the Main Dialog, where Measure will be enabled.
Clear Data Button Unpressed This button is disabled until a measurement has been configured using the
Configure button and made using the Measure button. If there are data in
program memory, clicking this button removes the data from program
memory. Clicking this button disables Clear Data .
Measure Button Unpressed This button is disabled until a measurement has been configured using the
Configure button. Clicking this button opens a subdialog in which one or
more measurements may be made using the current measurement configura-
tion values. The dialog will also display the measured data and list configu-
ration and extracted measurement parameters. When the Measurement Dia-
log is closed measured data remain in memory. These are written to the
Archive of the selected DataSet. Since there are data in memory, Clear Da-
ta will be enabled.
Click for Button Unpressed This button is always enabled. Clicking this button opens this help project
Dialog for Simple Measurement.
Instructions
Done Button Unpressed This button is always enabled. Clicking this button closes the Main Control
Dialog, terminates the Simple Measure process and returns Vision to the
idle state.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 349

Configuration Dialog

Setup Dialog

Figure 1 - Initial Configuration - No Task Name Assigned.

Figure 2 - Task Name is Assigned.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 350

Figure 3 - No Preset.
Discussion
The Simple Measure configuration dialog is opened when Configure is clicked in the Main Con-
trol Dialog. The dialog appears with no Task Name assigned and default values and selections
presented. At a minimum Task Name must have a non-empty text string for the dialog to close on
OK. The data will be stored under the Task Name in the selected DataSet Archive. A unique and
meaningful Task Name should be provided for clear archiving.

The user may provide a limited number of measurement specifications. The magnitude of Volts
specifies the maximum positive and negative voltage to be applied in the bipolar triangular
DRIVE waveform. The sign of Volts indicates the voltage direction (positive, then negative or
negative, then positive) the waveform will take. Period (ms) is the duration of the DRIVE profile
waveform. It is equivalent to 1000/Frequency (Hz).

When checked, Preset causes an unmeasured DRIVE profile to precede the measurement wave-
form. This forces the sample polarization (µC/cm2) to be switched into a state (negative or posi-
tive) opposite the voltage direction (positive or negative) of the first half of the voltage wave-
form. This ensures that the polarization will switch states during the application of the first half
of the waveform. Otherwise the behavior of sample polarization will depend on the polarization
condition the sample was left in - either within or outside Simple Measure - prior to the meas-
urement. If Preset is checked, the user defines a Preset Delay (ms) period over which zero Volts
are applied to the sample between the application of the present and measurement waveforms.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 351

Preset Delay (ms) is disabled if Preset is unchecked. For preset measurement, the preset delay
should be sufficient to allow sample charge motion, induced by the preset waveform, to settle
before the measurement is made.

As a simple measurement, there are many parameters that are not under users control. A partial
list includes:

1. High Voltage: Not available.
2. Profile: Fixed at bipolar triangular.
3. Bias Offset: Fixed at 0.0 V.
4. Auto Amp: Enabled.
5. Use Last Amp. Level: Enabled.
6. Maximum Waveform Signal Assigned as Field (kV/cm): Not Available.
7. Data Plotted Vs Field: Not Available.
8. Plot Titles: Automatically assigned.
9. Internal Reference Elements (1.0 nF Linear Capacitor, 2.5 MW Linear Resistor, RTI
4/20/80 PNZT): Not available.

Although a Profile Preview is not available, the image of Figure 4 shows the profile that will be
applied for the configuration of Figure 2.

Figure 4 - Simple Measure Profile.
The sample dimensions Area (cm2) and Thickness (µm) are specified in this dialog. Thickness
(µm) is the depth, in microns/micrometers, of the ferroelectric or dielectric material between the

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 352

sample electrodes. It is maintained merely as sample documentation. Area (cm2) is the surface
area, in square centimeters, of the smaller of the two sample electrodes (if they differ in size).
This also provides sample documentation. But this value is also used to normalize the measured
charge data to produce the polarization (µC/cm2) data that is reported by the Task.

Controls
Name Type Default Discussion
Task Name Text “” 60-Character Limit. This is the identifier for this execution, or series of execu-
tions, of the Simple Measure Task. The Task will be stored under this name in
the DataSet archive. The identifier should be unique and meaningful for ar-
chival purposes. This control must have a non-empty value assigned for OK to
close the dialog.
Volts Real 4.0 This is the sign and magnitude of the voltage waveform to be applied during
the sample preset, if enabled, and measurement. The magnitude entered here is
the magnitude of the maximum positive and negative voltages applied during
the preset and measurement waveforms. The sign of this value is the direction
(positive or negative) of the first half of the DRIVE voltage waveform.
Period (ms) Real 10.0 This is the duration, in milliseconds, of the preset (if enabled) and measurement
DRIVE waveforms. It is equivalent to 1000/Frequency (Hz)
Preset Check Checked When checked, an unmeasured DRIVE profile will precede the application of
Box the measurement profile. The purpose is to preset the sample's polarization
state into a state (negative or positive) opposite the direction (positive or nega-
tive) of the voltage over the first half of the measurement. This ensures that the
first half of the measurement loop switches the sample's polarization state. Oth-
erwise the behavior of the sample polarization will depend on previous (un-
known) signals applied to the sample - either within or outside of Simple
Measure - immediately before the measurement. If enabled, a zero-Volt delay
of Preset Delay (ms) length will separate the application of the preset and
measurement waveforms. If checked, Preset Delay (ms) is enabled. Otherwise
it is disabled.
Preset Real 1000.0 This control is enabled if Preset is checked. Otherwise it is disabled. This con-
Delay (ms) trol specifies, in milliseconds, the zero-Volt delay between the application of
the preset and measurement waveforms. This delay should be sufficient to al-
low any charge movement induced by the preset waveform to settle.
Area (cm2) Real 0.0001 This is the surface area of the sample's smaller electrode. This documents the
sample. However, the value is also used to normalize the sample's measured
charge, induced by the measurement DRIVE waveform, to generate the polari-
zation (µC/cm2) data displayed and stored by the Simple Measure process.
Thickness Real 0.1 This is the depth, in microns/micrometers, of the ferroelectric or dielectric ma-
(µm) terial between the sample electrodes. This value is stored to document the sam-
ple being measured.
Click For But- Un- Read this Help page.
Dialog ton pressed
Instructions
OK But- Un- Accept the configured values, close the dialog and return to the Main Control
ton pressed Dialog. Measure will be enabled on the Main Control Dialog. This button will
not close the dialog unless a non-empty text string is present in Task Name .

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 353

Measurement Dialog

Dialog

Figure 1 - Initial Dialog - No Measured Data.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 354

Figure 2 - First Measurement.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 355

Figure 3 - Second Measurement.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 356

Figure 4 - Third Measurement - Reconfigured.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 357

Figure 5 - Clear Measured Data.
Discussion
The Measurement Dialog will open when Measure is clicked on the Main Control Dialog. This
can only happen after the measurement has been configured. On initial access, there will be no
data displayed, the various list boxes will be empty and Clear Data will be disabled (Figure 1).
Clicking Measure will cause a single triangular bipolar Hysteresis measurement of the config-
ured voltage and period (ms) to be made on the sample that is connected to the tester DRIVE and
RETURN ports. Once made, the data are displayed in a plot on the dialog and the various con-
figuration and measurement parameters are appended to the list boxes. These parameters are dis-
cussed in detail in the table, below. Clear Data is enabled (Figure 2). The measurement may be
repeated any number of times (Figure 3). Clicking OK closes the dialog, writing the measured
data, if any, to the selected DataSet Archive and reopening the Main Control Dialog. In the main
dialog, the data may be cleared, so that the Measurement Dialog would again appear as the initial
dialog in Figure 1. Or the configuration may be adjusted and the measurement repeated with a
new set of voltage and period (ms) parameters (Figure 3). If the data are cleared within the
Measurement Dialog by clicking Clear Data (Figure 4) the measurement data are cleared from
the main process memory and no data will be written to the DataSet Archive on OK, if the dialog

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 358

is closed. However, the plot maintains the data and continues to display and the list boxes are not
cleared.

Controls
Name Type Default Discussion
Simple Data No Plot This is the plot display of the data. It is not shown if there are not data in
Measurement Plot memory, except that it will continue to display data if Clear Data is
clicked. A new data plot is appended to this display each time Measure is
clicked
Measure Button Unpressed Clicking this button causes a bipolar triangular Hysteresis measurement
to be made at the currently-specified voltage and period (ms). If no data
were previously displayed, the newly measured data will be shown on a
new data plot. If there are data displayed, the new data are appended to
the data in the data plot. Clear Data is enabled if previously disabled. The
configuration and measured parameters are appended to the various list
boxes as discussed below in this table.
Clear Data Button Unpressed This button is disabled until data are written into process memory using
the Measure button. Clicking this button removes all data from process
memory. Any data displayed in the plot and list boxes will remain dis-
played until the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is
made.
Volts Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the voltages at which all of the measurements have
been made.
Offset Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(µC/cm2) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the value used to center the polarization (µC/cm2)
data vertically about the voltage axis. Polarization (µC/cm2) is a relative
value that needs a reference. In a Hysteresis measurement, no such refer-
ence exists. Instead, the first measure point is arbitrarily set to 0.0
µC/cm2. All subsequent points are referenced to that 0.0 value. This shifts
the loop, vertically, in the direction of the sign of the first half loop max-
imum voltage. In order to produce the standard vertically-centered data,
the Offset (µC/cm2) value is subtracted from every point in the loop. The
offset is given as the maximum of the polarization values at the positive
and negative maximum voltage magnitudes:

Offset Offset (µC/cm2) = Polarization(VMax) Offset (µC/cm2) + Polariza-
tion(-VMax) (µC/cm2)/2 (1)

Note that the Offset (µC/cm2) is subtracted from the uncentered Hystere-
sis data before the calculation of PMax (µC/cm2), ±Pr (µC/cm2), ±Vc, Hori-
zontal Shift (V) and Vertical Shift (µC/cm2). This gives accurate deriva-
tion of these parameters.
PMax Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(µC/cm2) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the Polarization (µC/cm2) at the maximum magni-

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 359

tude voltage of the first half of the loop. This value is calculated after the
Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the data.
Period (ms) Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the period (ms) at which each of the measurements
is made. Period is equivalent to 1000/Frequency (Hz).
Pr (µC/cm2) Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the Polarization (µC/cm2) at which the voltage is
zero Volts when switching from positive to negative voltage. If the cur-
rently configured voltage is negative, this value is the last measured point.
This value is calculated after the Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the
data.
-Pr (µC/cm2) Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the Polarization (µC/cm2) at which the voltage is
zero Volts when switching from negative to positive voltage. If the cur-
rently configured voltage is positive, this value is the last measured point.
This value is calculated after the Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the
data.
Use Preset Boolean Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the enabling or disabling of the preset waveform
for each recorded measurement.
Vc Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, voltage at which polarization (µC/cm2) is zero
when switching from negative to positive polarization (µC/cm2). This is
the positive Coercive Voltage. This value is calculated after the Offset
(µC/cm2) is removed from the data.
-Vc Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, voltage at which polarization (µC/cm2) is zero
when switching from positive to negative polarization (µC/cm2). This is
the negative Coercive Voltage. This value is calculated after the Offset
(µC/cm2) is removed from the data.
Preset Delay Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(ms) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the delay period between the application of the
preset and measurement waveforms if the preset is enabled. Entries in this
box have no meaning if present is not enabled for the particular entry.
Horizontal Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
Shift (V) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the average of positive and negative Coercive

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 360

Voltages:

Horizontal Shift (V) = ( Vc + - Vc )/ 2 (2)

This value is calculated after the Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the
data.
Vertical Shift Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(µC/cm2) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the average of positive and negative Pr (:µC/cm2).

Vertical Shift (V) = ( Pr + -Pr )/ 2 (3)

This value is calculated after the Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the
data.
Area (cm2) Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, The surface area of the top electrode of the sam-
ple(s) that have been measured. This value is used to normalize the cap-
tured charge to produce the polarization (µC/cm2).data. It scaled the data
presented in Sample Measurement , PMax (µC/cm2) , Pr (µC/cm2) , -Pr
(µC/cm2) , Vertical Shift (µC/cm2) and Loop Area (V·µC/cm2) .
CMax Eff Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(nF) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the effective capacitance of the measured sample at
the maximum programmed voltage. (Note that, for non-linear - ferroelec-
tric - devices, capacitance is not a constant.) The capacitance is derived
from the relationship

Charge (Q in Coulombs) = Capacitance (F) x Volts => C (F) = Q (C) / V
(4)

For the measurement at maximum voltage:

CMax Eff (nF) = PMax (µC/cm2) x 1000 (nC/µC) x Area (cm2) / Current
Maximum Voltage (5)

This value is calculated after the Offset (µC/cm2) is removed from the
data.
Loop Area Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(V·µC/cm2) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the integral of the interior of the Hysteresis Polari-
zation (µC/cm2) Vs Voltage data. This value is calculated after the Offset
(µC/cm2) is removed from the data.
Thickness Real Empty This box is empty until a measurement is made using the Measure button.
(µm) List This list box will not be visibly emptied using the Clear Data button until
Box the dialog is closed and reopened or a new measurement is made. This
box lists, in sequence, the linear depth of the ferroelectric or dielectric
material between the sample electrodes.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 361

Click For Button Unpressed Read this Help page.
Dialog In-
structions
OK Button Unpressed Close the dialog. Cause the data currently in memory, if any to be written
to the selected DataSet Archive. Reopen the Main Control Dialog with
Clear Data enabled if there are data in process memory.
Cancel Button Unpressed Close the dialog. Do not write data to the selected DataSet Archive. Reo-
pen the Main Control Dialog. If no data were in process memory when
Measure was clicked, do not enable Clear Data .

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 362

XVIII - Newly-Added Tools

1. Runtime Tabular Text Export.
2. Runtime Data Image Export.
3. Custom Text-File Branch Loop Parameter Adjustment.
4. Runtime Input-File Task Configuration.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 363

Runtime Tabular Text Export

After QuikLook execution or when recalled from a DataSet Archive, all Tasks may have config-
uration parameters and, for data-collecting Tasks, measured data exported to targets outside Vi-
sion including:

• Direct to Printer.
• Text File.
• Excel Table.
• Word Document.

Data-collecting Tasks may also export to a Vision Data File (VDF/*.vis) and/or have their data
plot images exported to a Windows Meta File, JPEG file or Bitmap file. (Vision Data Files allow
data to be exported by one Task of a particular type and then imported by another, allowing data
to be moved from one Vision location to another as described below.)

Such exporting is performed after the Task has completed execution and, for Tasks recorded into
a DataSet Archive, only on Archive Regraph. Runtime export can be accomplished by including
a Print/Export Filter Task in the Test Definition, but this is a rather clumsy procedure that slows
Test Definition execution.

Recently, data-collecting Tasks, including Measurement and Filter Tasks, have been fitted with a
Runtime Tabular Text Export option. In this option the Task will export all data collected at a
single execution to a single text file at execution time. Only measured data are exported in tabu-
lar format, with column headings. Header information, common to standard Task exporting, is
not available. Hysteresis-based Tasks, and Filters, that generate or collect columns of data output
data from each measured point, line-by-line in the data columns. Other Tasks that collect only
single-point data, such as pulse-based Tasks, will output data in a single line under the column
headings. In either case, the first line of data will include any derived single-point data and a
date/time stamp.

Each line that is appended to a runtime text file will be appended to any previous line exported.
That means that a single file may be assigned to multiple Task executions - as in a Branch Loop
and/or in repeated Test Definition executions. Multiple Tasks may even be configured with the
same file name so that data from multiple sources may be gathered into one common file.

As a final note, the columns output to the text file are single-tab-delimited. That means that the
data may appear offset from the column headers when viewed in Notepad or other text editor.
However, the data will import correctly into Excel, Origin or other data manipulation program.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 364

Figure 1 - Hysteresis Task Runtime Tabular Text File Output Over
Two Task Executions.
Note that Runtime Tabular Text Exporting is configured in the Task that is to be doing the exe-
cution. Configuration is similar for all data-collecting Tasks. Figure 2 shows the configuration
procedures for the Hysteresis Task.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 365

Figure 2 - Setup Runtime Tabular Text File Exporting.

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 366

Runtime Data Image Export

Data-collecting Tasks that generate data plots on execution - primarily Filter Tasks - can be con-
figured to allow the data images to be exported to Windows Meta File, JPEG or Bitmap files at
execution time as the plots are generated. To exercise this option the Task plot configuration dia-
log has the desired image format output enabled. Then a Browse to File button is used to open a
standard Windows file browser dialog that allows the file path and a baseline file name to be
specified.

The specified file name serves as a root identifier to which an index and date/time stamp are ap-
pended. This renders the file name unique over repeated Task executions. It allows the Task to
operate in a Branch Loop and/or over repeated Test Definition executions without the need to
overwrite the file. Figure 1 shows the Hysteresis Filter Task configured to output a Bitmap im-
age file of the plot to a file with baseline path and name "D:\Help 5.x.x\Task Help (b)\Hysteresis
Filter\Dr. Explain\Hysteresis FIlter Normalized Capacitance Data.bmp".

Figure 1 - Configure the Hysteresis Filter Task to Write a Bitmap
Image File of the Data Plot at Runtime.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 367

Figure 2 shows the Task's bitmap image output over five Branch Loop iterations.

Figure 2 - Bitmap Files Output by the Hysteresis Filter Task over
Five Branch Loop Iterations.
Figure 3 shows the contents of Hysteresis Filter Normalized Capacitance Da-
ta.3.2017.12.21.15.24.bmp.

Figure 3 - Hysteresis Filter Normalized Capacitance Data Bitmap
Image.
Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/
Main Vision Manual 368

Custom Text-File Branch Loop Parameter Adjustment

Copyright Radiant Technologies, Inc. 2021 - This work is licensed under a Creative Commons At-
tribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 2.5 License. http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-

sa/2.5/